|
Toshiba Personal Computer
TECRA A9 Series
( TECRA S5 / TECRA P5 /Satellite Pro S200 )
Maintenace Manual
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-633
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the
Toshiba Personal Computer TECRA A9,S5,P5,Satellite Pro S200.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
DANGER: “Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance
service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety
precautions are adhered to strictly.
‰ Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause
overheating, smoke or fire.
‰ If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong
battery can cause the battery to explode.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Hardware Overview describes the TECRA A9,S5,P5, Satellite Pro
S200 system unit and each FRU.
Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve
FRU problems.
Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.
Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.
Appendices The appendices describe the following:
‰ Handling the LCD module
‰ Board layout
‰ Pin assignments
‰ Keyboard scan/character codes
‰ Key layout
‰ Wiring diagrams
‰ BIOS rewrite procedures
‰ EC/KBC rewrite procedures
‰ Reliability
iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and
operating procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face
below:
Format complete
System transferred
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Features...................................................................................................................... 1-1
System Unit Block Diagram...................................................................................... 1-8
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External) ........................................................... 1-14
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive......................................................................................... 1-15
Optical Drive (ODD) ............................................................................................... 1-16
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 1-19
TFT Color Display................................................................................................... 1-20
Power Supply........................................................................................................... 1-22
Batteries ................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.10 AC Adaptor.............................................................................................................. 1-30
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................ 2-2
Power Supply Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 2-6
System Board Troubleshooting................................................................................ 2-16
USB FDD Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 2-31
HDD Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-34
Keyboard and Touch pad Troubleshooting.............................................................. 2-39
Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-42
Optical Drive Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 2-44
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-46
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-48
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-49
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-52
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-55
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting......................................................................... 2-58
2.16 Fingerprint Sensor Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 2-59
vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
Setting of the hardware configuration ....................................................................... 3-9
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-48
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-49
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-51
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-52
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-58
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g,a/b/g Setting up of REF PC)............ 3-60
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC( Intel-made)........................................... 3-65
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-73
3.29 Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-80
3.30 BIOS SETUP ........................................................................................................... 3-86
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Overview...................................................................................................................4-1
Battery pack ..............................................................................................................4-8
PC card....................................................................................................................4-10
Bridge Media ..........................................................................................................4-11
HDD........................................................................................................................4-12
MDC/Memory module............................................................................................4-16
Keyboard ................................................................................................................4-19
Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-23
SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.10 Fan hood................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.11 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-29
4.12 Optical drive............................................................................................................. 4-33
4.13 Cover assembly and base assembly ......................................................................... 4-36
4.14 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-39
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-42
4.16 RTC battery.............................................................................................................. 4-45
4.17 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-47
4.18 RGB board ............................................................................................................... 4-48
4.19 System board............................................................................................................ 4-51
4.20 Battery lock/Battery latch ........................................................................................ 4-58
4.21 HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable.................................................................. 4-60
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU................................... 4-62
4.23 PC card slot.............................................................................................................. 4-70
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-71
4.25 Cover latch............................................................................................................... 4-75
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................................................... 4-76
4.27 LCD cable ................................................................................................................ 4-87
4.28 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-89
4.29 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-92
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-95
viii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Board Layout ................................................................................................ B-1
Appendix C Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes .................................................................. D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................F-1
Appendix G BIOS rewrite Procedures .............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite Procedures......................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Hardware Overview
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Chapter 1
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Features.......................................................................................................................1-1
System Unit Block Diagram.......................................................................................1-8
3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)............................................................1-14
2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................1-15
Optical Drive (ODD)................................................................................................1-16
Keyboard .................................................................................................................1- 19
TFT Color Display ..................................................................................................1- 20
1.7.1
1.7.2
LCD Module ......................................................................................1- 20
FL Inverter Board ..............................................................................1- 21
1.8
1.9
Power Supply...........................................................................................................1- 22
Batteries...................................................................................................................1- 27
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
Main Battery ......................................................................................1- 27
Battery Charging Control...................................................................1- 28
RTC battery........................................................................................1- 29
1.10 AC Adaptor .............................................................................................................1- 30
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Front of the computer ....................................................................................1- 6
System unit configuration..............................................................................1- 7
System unit block diagram ............................................................................1- 8
3.5-inch FDD (USB External).....................................................................1- 14
2.5-inch HDD ..............................................................................................1- 15
Keyboard .....................................................................................................1- 19
LCD module ................................................................................................1- 20
Tables
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Table 1-8
Table 1-9
Table 1-10
3.5-inch FDD specifications........................................................................1- 14
2.5-inch HDD specifications .......................................................................1- 15
DVD Super Multi drive specifications........................................................1- 16
LCD module specifications .........................................................................1- 18
FL inverter board specifications..................................................................1- 20
Power supply output rating..........................................................................1- 22
Battery specifications ..................................................................................1- 26
Time required for charges ...........................................................................1- 27
RTC battery charging/data preservation time..............................................1- 28
AC adapter specifications............................................................................1- 29
1-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
The Toshiba TECRA A9(S5,P5,Satellite Pro S200) Personal Computer uses extensive Large
Scale Integration (LSI), and Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS)
technology extensively to provide compact size, minimum weight, low power usage and high
reliability. This computer incorporates the following features.
There some models and options. Refer to the Parts List for the configuration of each model
and options.
‰ Microprocessor
The TECRA A9(S5,P5,Satellite Pro S200) computer is equipped with an Intel® CoreTM
Duo Processor . These processors incorporate a math co-processor, a 2MB or 4MB L2
cache memory.
2
The PC comes in with one of the following speeds:
Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor
•
•
2.40GHz (T7700) /2.20GHz (T7500) / 2.00GHz (T7300)
In the case of Processor which built in 4MB L2 cache memory
1.80GHz (T7100)
In the case of Processor which built in 2MB L2 cache memory
These processors operate at 800MHz bus clock.
‰ Chipset
The TECRA A9(S5,P5,Satellite Pro S200) is Equipped with Intel 965GM/GML
(Crestline-GM) as North Bridge, Intel ICH8M as South Bridge and PCI7412 as Card
Controller.
‰ VGA Controller
As for a TECRA A9 or P5 or Satellite Pro S200 , the internal graphics controller in North
Bridge is used.(PTS52*)
As for a TECRA S5 or P5, the graphics controller is nVIDIA G8M-SE or GS.(PTS53*)
‰ Memory
The computer comes with two DDR2 SO-DIMM slots. Two memory modules of ,
512MB, 1GB (1,024MB) or 2GB (2,048MB) can be installed.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ HDD
The computer has a 2.5-inch SATA HDD. The following capacities are available.
•
/80/100/120/160 GB
‰ USB FDD
A 3.5-inch USB FDD accommodates 2HD (1.44MB) or 2DD (720KB) disks.
‰ Optical Drive
A CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive (double
layer) can be installed.
‰ Display
The PC comes in with one of the following two types:
•
•
15.4” WXGA-TFT color display, resolution 1,280×800
15.4” WXGA+TFT color display, resolution 1,680×1050
A video controller and a 128MB VRAM enables an external monitor to display 16M
colors at a resolution of 1,280×800 pixels or 1,680×1050 pixels.
‰ Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 85(US)/87(UK)-key keyboard provides a numeric keypad overlay for fast
numeric data entry or for cursor and page control. The keyboard also includes two keys
that have special functions in Microsoft® Windows® Vista. It supports software that uses
a 101- or 102-key enhanced keyboard.
‰ TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
The TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device consists of Touch Pad and AccuPoint. The touch
pad and control buttons enable control of the on-screen pointer and scrolling of windows.
The pointer control stick and AccuPoint enables convenient control of the cursor.
‰ Batteries
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC
battery (that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard, which
enables data transfer speeds 40 times faster than USB1.1 standard. USB1.1 is also
supported.
‰ IEEE 1394 port
The computer comes with one IEEE 1394 port. It enables high-speed data transfer
directly from external devices such as digital video cameras.
‰ Serial port
The serial port enables connection of serial devices such as an external modem, serial
mouse or serial printer.
‰ External monitor (RGB) port
The port enables connection of an external monitor, which is recognized automatically by
Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) Display Data Channel (DDC) 2B
compatible functions.
‰ PC card slot
A PC card slot are provided. The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one Type II
card or Express Slot(Choose only one) .
‰ Bridge Media slot
One SD memory card/ SDIO card/Memory stick (PRO)/xD picture card/MultiMedia card
slot. Data can be read and written by inserting each media to the slot.
‰ Fingerprint sensor
The computer is equipped with a fingerprint sensor and fingerprint authentication utility.
They enable only person who has registered his/her fingerprint to use the computer.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Docking interface port
The docking interface port enables connection of an optional Express Port Replicator. It
provides additional features as follows:
• RJ45 LAN jack
• External monitor port
• DC IN 15V jack
• Security lock slot
• Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)
• DVI port
‰ Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stereo speakers
Built-in microphone
Digital volume control
Stereo headphone jack
External microphone jack
Supports VoIP
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Internal modem
The computer contains a MDC, enabling data and fax communication. It supports ITU-T
V.90 (V.92). The transfer rates are 56 Kbps for data reception, 33.6 Kbps for data
transmission, and 14,400 bps for fax transmission. However, the actual speed depends on
the line quality. The RJ11 modem jack is used to accommodate a telephone line. Both of
V.90 and V.92 are supported only in USA, Canada and Australia. Only V.90 is available
in other regions.
‰ Internal LAN
The computer is equipped with LAN circuits that support Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T). It also supports Wakeup on LAN (WOL), Magic
Packet and LED.
θ Wireless LAN
The computer is equipped with PCI-Ex MiniCard type wireless LAN board that supports
802.11 a/b/g or 802.11 a/b/g/n in the PCI-Ex MiniCard slot. This function can be switched
on and off by a switch on the computer.
‰ Bluetooth
The computer is equipped with Bluetooth (V2.0+EDR) communications standard enable
wireless connection between electronic devices such as computers and printers. It
supports wireless communication switch.
‰ TOSHIBA Presentation button
This button switches the display between internal display, external display, simultaneous
display and multi-monitor display.
‰ TOSHIBA Assist button
When this button is pressed during power-on, the PC is connected to "Toshiba Assist".
When this button is pressed during power-off, the PC is turned on and connected to
"Toshiba Assist".
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
The front of the computer is shown in figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
The system unit configuration is shown in figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.
Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1 Hardware Overview
The system unit is composed of the following major components:
‰ Processor
• Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo Processor
• Core speed:
•
2.40GHz (T7700) /2.20GHz (T7500) / 2.00GHz (T7300)
In the case of Processor which built in 4MB L2 cache memory
1.80GHz (T7100)
•
In the case of Processor which built in 2MB L2 cache memory
(
): Processor Number
– Processor bus speed: 800MHz
– Core voltage: 0.50V to 1.325V
– Integrated L2 cache memory of 2MB or 4MB
– Integrated NDP
– 478-pin Micro FC-PGA package
‰ Memory
Two memory slots are provided. Expansion up to 4GB (4,096MB) is available.
Memory
• DDR2-SDRAM
• 667MHz
• 1.8 volt operation
• FBGA
Memory Module
• 200 pin, SO Dual In-line Memory Module (SO-DIMM)
• PC 5300
• 512MB/1GB (1,024MB)/2GB (2,048MB)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
‰ Intel 965GM/GML (Crestline-GM (North Bridge))
• Features:
– Meorom Processor System Bus Supports
– PCI Express Based Graphics Interface
– System Memory supports :DDR2-533／DDR2-667, 4GB max.
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– Power management control (ACPI2.0 conformity)
‰ Intel ICH8M (South Bridge)
• Features:
– DMI(Direct Media Interface)
– PCI Express Interface
– PCI Bus I/F Rev2.3（4 PCI REQ/GNT Pairs）
– Integrated Serial ATA Host Controller
– Integrated IDE Controller（Ultra ATA 100/66/33）
– Intel High Definition controller (Azalia)
– USB 1.1/2.0 Controller
– Power Management (ACPI 2.0 compliance)
– SMBus2.0 controller
– SPI Interface(BIOS)
– LPC interface (EC/KBC, Super I/O)
– IRQ controller
– Serial Interrupt Function
– Suspend/Resume control
– Built –in RTC
– GPIO
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Cardbus controller (TI PCI8412ZHK)
− PCI Interface(PCI Rev.2.2)
− SD IO Controller(Ver.1.1)
− CardBus / Ultra media Controller (Yenta Ver.2.2:1 socket)
− SD/MMC(SDHC Ver. 1.2 revised edition) , Memory Stick, Memory Stick
pro, XD Card Controller
− 1394 Controller
− 16 x16x1.4mm BGA Package
‰ VGA
As for a TECRA A9 or Satellite Pro S200 , the internal graphics controller in North
Bridge is used.(PTS52*)
As for a TECRA S5, the graphics controller is nVIDIA G8M-SE or GS.(PTS53*)
‰ Sound Controller
• Azalia
• Amplifier: Mathushita made AN12941A
• Stereo speakers
• Digital volume control
• Supports VoIP
• Stereo headphone jack
• External microphone jack
• Built-in microphone
‰ EC/KBC (Embedded Controller/Keyboard Controller)
• One Mitsubishi M306KAFCLPR micon chip functions as both EC and KBC.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
‰ PSC (Power Supply Controller)
• One TMP86FS49AUG chip is used.
• This controller controls the power sources.
‰ Clock Generator
• IDT 9LPR501PGLFT is used.
• This device generates the system clock.
‰ Modem Controller
• One MDC is used.
• This controller has the following functions:
– One RJ11 port
– Azalia MDC1.5
– V.92 (V.90) 56K Modem/FAX
– Ring wake up support
‰ Internal LAN Controller
• Intel made only GigaBit Ether is used.
• This controller has the following functions:
– PCI-Ex connection
– Supports Gigabit Ethernet
– One RJ45 port
– WOL support
– Magic Packet support
– LED support
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1 Hardware Overview
‰ Wireless LAN
•
•
•
•
One PCI-Ex MiniCard
Intel Kedron a/b/g or a/b/g/n
Supports Wireless Communication SW
Supports W-LAN via PCMCIA (Euro : GSM/GPRS)
‰ Super I/O
• SMSC LPC47N217-JVchip is used.
• This gate array has the following features:
– Serial Port Controller
– GPIO Controller
‰ Bluetooth
• V2.0+EDR
• USB interface connection
‰ Sensor
• Thermal Sensor: One ADM1032ARMZ chip is used.
• LCD Sensor: One NRS-701-1015T chip is used.
• Acceleration Sensor
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.3 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)
1.3 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive (USB External)
The 3.5-inch FDD is a thin, high-performance reliable drive that supports 720KB (formatted)
2DD and 1.44MB (formatted) 2HD disks.
The FDD is shown in figure 1-4. The specifications for the FDD are listed in Table 1-1.
Figure 1-4 3.5-inch FDD (USB External)
Table 1-1 3.5-inch FDD specifications
TEAC FD-05PUB-337
(G8AC0000B320)
Items
720KB mode
250K bits/second
1.44MB mode
Data transfer rate FDD part
USB
500K bits/second
Full speed mode (12M bits/second)
Disk rotation speed
Track density
300rpm
5.3 track/mm (135TPI)
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
1 Hardware Overview
1.4 2.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
The removable HDD is a random access non-volatile storage device. It has a non-removable
2.5-inch magnetic disk and mini-Winchester type magnetic heads.
The computer supports a 80GB, 120GB or 160GB.
The HDD is shown in figure 1-5. Specifications are listed in Table 1-2.
Figure 1-5 2.5-inch HDD
Table 1-2 2.5-inch HDD specifications
Items
Specifications
FUJITSU FUJITSU
FUJITSU
FUJITSU
G8BC0003H060 G8BC0003J080 G8BC0003H120 G8BC0003J160
Outline
Dimensions
Width
(mm)
100.0
Height
(mm)
9.5
70.0
Depth
(mm)
Weight
(g)
101 max
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
60GB
80GB
120GB
160GB
5,400
Data transfer speed (Mb/s)
To/Form Media
72.4 MB/s Max
150 MB/s (Genli)
To/Form Host
Data buffer size (MB/s)
8
Positioning Time(read and
seek time)
Read: 12ms
4
Motor startup time (s)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 Optical Drive (ODD)
1.5 Optical Drive (ODD)
1.5.1 CD-ROM Drive
The CD-ROM drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch) CD-ROM.
The specifications of the CD-ROM are described in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 CD-ROM drive specifications
Specifications
Item
TEAC G8CC00039520
Outline
dimensions
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
128 (excluding projections)
12.7(excluding projections)
129.4 (excluding projections)
165 or less
Data transfer speed (Read)
CD-ROM
Max. 24x CAV
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
33.3Mbytes/sec max.
1,545 -3,600kB/sec
Burst
Sustained
Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
110 typ.
Supported Disks
CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R,
CD-RW
Supported Formats
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA,
PHOTO CD, Enhanced CD
1-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Optical Drive (ODD)
1 Hardware Overview
1.5.2 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-
inch) CD-ROM, DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW.
The specifications of the DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive are described in Table 1-4.
Table 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications
Specifications
Item
MATSUSHITA G8CC0003B520
Outline
dimensions
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
128 (excluding projections)
12.7 (excluding projections)
129 (excluding projections)
180±10
Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM
Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
High Speed CD-RW
Ultra Speed CD-RW
Max. 24x CAV
Max. 4x CLV
Max. 10x CLV
Max. 24x CAV
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
Ultra DMA Mode
Data Buffer Capacity
2MB
Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
180 typ. (Random)
130 typ. (Random)
Supported Formats
CD: CD/CD-ROM (12cm，8cm), CD-R, CD-
RW, CD-DA, CD-ROM XA, Photo CD,
CD-Extra(CD+), CD-text
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW (Ver1.2),
DVD-Video, DVD+R, DVD+RW,
DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 Optical Drive (ODD)
1.5.3 DVD-Super Multi Drive
The DVD Super Multi drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch)
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-
RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL.
The specifications are listed in Table 1-5.
Table 1-5 DVD Super Multi drive specifications
Item
Specifications
MATSUSHITA G8CC0002Y520
128 (excluding projections)
12.7 (excluding projections)
129.4 (excluding projections)
190±10
Outline
dimensions
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
Data transfer speed (Read)
DVD-ROM
CD-ROM
Max. 8x CAV
Max. 24x CAV
Data transfer speed (Write)
CD-R
CD-RW
Max. 24x ZCLV
Max. 16x CLV (Ultra speed)
Max. 8x ZCLV
DVD-R
DVD-RW
Max. 4x CLV
DVD-R DL
DVD+R
Max. 2x ZCLV
Max. 8x ZCLV
DVD+R DL
DVD+RW
DVD-RAM
Max. 2.4x CLV
Max. 4x ZCLV
Max. 5x ZCLV (4.7GB)
ATAPI Burst (MB/s)
PIO Mode
DMA Mode
16.6 (PIO MODE4)
16.6 (Multi Word Mode2)
33.3 (Ultra DMA Mode2)
Ultra DMA Mode
Data Buffer Capacity
2MB
Access time (ms)
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
150msec typ.
180msec typ.
Supported Disks
CD: CD-ROM (12cm, 8cm), CD-R, CD-RW
DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD+RW
Supported Formats
CD: CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-ROM XA, PHOTO CD,
CD-Extra(CD+), CD-text
DVD: DVD-R, DVD-RW (Ver. 1.1, 1.2), DVD-Video, DVD+R,
DVD+RW, DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB)
1-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Keyboard
1 Hardware Overview
1.6 Keyboard
The keyboard is mounted 85(US)/87(UK) keys that consist of character key and control key,
and in conformity with JIS. The keyboard is connected to membrane connector on the system
board and controlled by the keyboard controller.
Figure 1-6 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.
Figure 1-6 Keyboard
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.7 TFT Color Display
1.7 TFT Color Display
The TFT color display consists of 15.4-inch WXGA/WXGA+ LCD module and FL inverter
board.
1.7.1
LCD Module
The LCD module used for the TFT color display uses a backlight as the light source and can
display a maximum of 16M colors with 1,280 x 800 or 1,680x1050 resolution. The Intel
Crestline-GM can control internal and external WXGA or WXGA+ support displays
simultaneously.
Figure 1-7 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-4 lists the specifications.
Figure 1-7 LCD module
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications (1/3)
Specifications
Item
15.41-inch WXGA TFT (G33C0003F110)
Number of Dots
1,280 (W) x 800 (H)
0.25875 (H) x 0.25875 (V)
344.0 (H) x 222.0(V)x6.5 (D:Max)
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)
Table 1-4 LCD module specifications (2/2)
Specifications
15.4-inch WXGA+ TFT (G33C0003Z110)
1,680 (W) x 1050 (H)
Item
Number of Dots
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)
0.19725 (H) x 0.19725 (V)
344.0 (H) x 222.0(V)x6.5 (D:Max)
1-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.7 TFT Color Display
1 Hardware Overview
1.7.2
FL Inverter Board
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module.
Table 1-5 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-5 FL inverter board specifications
Item
Specifications
G71C0006A110
Input
Voltage (V)
DC 5
7
Power (W)
Voltage (V)
Current (mA)
Power (mA)
Output
750
5.90
5W/7VA
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 Power Supply
1.8 Power Supply
The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the
following functions:
1. Judges that the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.
3. Controls the battery icon, and DC IN icon.
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.
5. Turns the power supply on and off.
6. Provides more accurate detection of a low battery.
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.
The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-6.
1-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 Power Supply
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-6 Power supply output rating (1/4)
Use
Voltage (V)
Name
CK-EYV
Clock Gen
3.3
M-E3V
P3V
1.05
1.5
1R05-P1V
1R05-P1V
PPV
CPU
0.55-1.325
1.05
1.05
1.25
1.25
1.5
1R05M-E1V
1R05-P1V
1R25M-E1V
1R25-P1V
1R5-P1V
1R8-B1V
IGD-PGV
P3V
(G)MCH
1.8
1.05
3.3
0.9
0R9-B0V
1R8-B1V
1R05-P1V
1R25-P1V
1R5-P1V
E3V
Memory
1.8
1.05
1.25
1.5
3.3
ICH8M(-E)
3.3
LAN-E3V
P3V
3.3
2-3.5
R3V
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 Power Supply
Table 1-6 Power supply output rating (2/4)
Use
Voltage (V)
Name
3.3
5
P3V
P5V
ODD
3.3
5
SB-P3V
SB-P5V
P3V
3.3
5
HDD
P5V
Card Cont.
PC Card
3.3
3.3
5
P3V
MCVCCA-PYV
MCVPPA-PYV
P5V
5
PC Card PS
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.5
3.3
3.3
1.5
3.3
3.3
1.5
3.3
3.3
P3V
SD Card
FM-P3V
P3V
SD Card PS
CRD1R5-P1V
CRD-E3V
CRD-P3V
1R5-P1V
E3V
Express Card
Express Card PS
W-LAN
P3V
1R5-P1V
E3V
P3V
1-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 Power Supply
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-6 Power supply output rating (3/4)
Use
Voltage (V)
Name
SIM Card
3.3
1.5
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
5
UIMPWR-E3V
1R5-P1V
Robson
P3V
SPI
MDC
LAN-E3V
E3V
EC/KBC
Touch Pad
LED
S3V
SP-P5V
M5V
5
3.3
3.3
3.3
3.3
5
E3V
TPM
P3V
Accelerometer
Finger Sens.
S3V
FS-E3V
FS-E5V
E3V
Finger Sens PS.
Super I/O
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.05
1.8
3.3
3.3
3.3
5
P3V
RS232C Driver
P3V
LN1R0- E1V
LN1R8- E1V
LNP -E3V
E3V
LAN
LAN PS
Bluetooth
BT-P3V
P5V
Bluetooth PS
5
USB0PS-E5V
USB1PS-E5V
E5V
USB
5
USB PS
5
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 Power Supply
Table 1-6 Power supply output rating (4/4)
Use
Voltage (V)
Name
1.2
1.8
3.3
1.0-1.1
1.8
5
1R2-P1V
1R8-P1V
P3V
GPU
PGV
VRAM
LCD
1R8-P1V
FL-P5V
PNL-P3V
P5V
3.3
5
LCD PS
DVI Transmitter
AMP
3.3
2.5
4.7
5
P3V
2R5-P2V
A4R7-P4V
SND-P5V
A4R7-P4V
P3V
4.7
3.3
3.3
5
CODEC
Headphone AMP
PSC
P3V
MCV
5
E5V
FAN
5
P5V
1-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Batteries
1 Hardware Overview
1.9 Batteries
The computer has three types of batteries as follows:
‰
‰
Main battery pack
RTC battery
The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-7.
Table 1-7 Battery specifications
Battery name
Material
Output
voltage
Capacity
battery
battery
battery
G71C00083110/210
G71C00084110/210
G71C0006B110/210
G71C0003W910/A10
Lithium-Ion
Lithium-Ion
Lithium-Ion
10.8 V
10.8 V
10.8 V
4,000 mAh
5,100 mAh
5,400 mAh
7,200 mAh
Main
battery
High capacity
Lithium-Ion
NiMH
10.8 V
2.4 V
battery
RTC battery
GDM710000041
16 mAh
1.9.1
Main Battery
The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor
is not attached. The main battery maintains the state of the computer when the computer
enters in sleep mode.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.9 Batteries
1.9.2
Battery Charging Control
Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The microprocessor
controls whether the charge is on or off and detects a full charge when the AC adaptor and
battery are attached to the computer. The system charges the battery.
Battery Charge
When the AC adaptor is attached, there are two types of charge: When the system is powered
off and when the system is powered on. Table 1-8 lists the charging time required for charges.
Table 1-8 Time required for charges
Battery type
Battery(4,000 mAh)
Power on (hours)
About 4.5 to 9.5
About 5.5 to 12.0
About 5.5 to 12.0
About 8.0 to 19.5
Power off (hours)
About 2.5
Battery(5,100 mAh)
About 3.0
Battery(5,400 mAh)
About 3.0
High capacity battery(7,200 mAh)
About 3.5
NOTE: The time required when the system is powered on is affected by the amount of
power the system is consuming. Use of the fluorescent lamp and frequent disk
access diverts power and lengthens the charge time.
If any of the following occurs, the battery charge process stops.
1. The battery becomes fully charged.
2. The AC adaptor or battery is removed.
3. The battery or output voltage is abnormal.
‰ Detection of full charge
A full charge is detected only when the battery is charging at charge. A full charge is
detected under any of the following conditions:
1. The current in the battery charging circuit drops under the predetermined limit.
2. The charging time exceeds the fixed limit.
1-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Batteries
1 Hardware Overview
1.9.3
RTC battery
The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information
in memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-9 lists the charging time and data
preservation period of the RTC battery.
Table 1-9 RTC battery charging/data preservation time
Status
Time
Charging Time (power on)
24 hours
30 days
Data preservation period (full charge)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.10 AC Adapter
1.10 AC Adapter
The AC adapter is also used to charge the battery.
Table 1-10 lists the AC adapter specifications.
Table 1-10 AC adapter specifications
Parameter
Specification
G71C0006Q210 (2-pin) G71C0006R210 (3-pin)
Power
75W (Peak 90W)
100V/240V
Input voltage
Input frequency
Input current
50Hz to 60Hz
1.5A or less (100V-240V)
15V
B Output voltage
Output current
0A to 5A (At constant voltage mode)
5A to 6A (At surge load mode)
1-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.10 AC Adapter
1 Hardware Overview
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Chapter 2
Contents
2.1
2.2
2.3
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart ........................................................................................2-2
Power Supply Troubleshooting ..................................................................................2-6
Procedure 1 Icons in the LCD Check...............................................................2-6
Procedure 2 Error Code Check ........................................................................2-7
Procedure 3 Connection Check......................................................................2-13
Procedure 4 Charge Check.............................................................................2-14
Procedure 5 Replacement Check....................................................................2-15
System Board Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-16
Procedure 1 Message Check ..........................................................................2-17
Procedure 2 Serial Port Check (Boot Mode)..................................................2-19
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-29
Procedure 4 Replacement Check....................................................................2-30
USB FDD Troubleshooting......................................................................................2-31
Procedure 1 USB FDD Head Cleaning Check...............................................2-31
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-32
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-33
HDD Troubleshooting..............................................................................................2-34
Procedure 1 Message Check ..........................................................................2-34
Procedure 2 Partition Check...........................................................................2-35
Procedure 3 Format Check.............................................................................2-36
Procedure 4 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-37
Procedure 5 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-38
Keyboard and Dual point Troubleshooting..............................................................2-39
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-39
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-40
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.8
Display Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-42
Procedure 1 External Monitor Check.............................................................2-42
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-42
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Cable Check ...........................................2-42
Procedure 4 Replacement Check....................................................................2-43
Optical Drive Troubleshooting.................................................................................2-44
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-44
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-45
2.9
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................2-46
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-46
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-47
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................2-48
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-48
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-48
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting.......................................................................................2-49
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-49
Procedure 2 Connection Check......................................................................2-50
Procedure 3 Replacement Check....................................................................2-51
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting ...............................................................................2-52
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check ..................................................2-52
Procedure 2 Antenna Connection Check .......................................................2-53
Procedure 3 Replacement Check....................................................................2-54
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting ............................................................................................2-55
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-55
Procedure 2 Connector Check........................................................................2-56
Procedure 3 Replacement Check....................................................................2-57
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting..........................................................................2-58
Procedure 1 Check on Windows OS..............................................................2-58
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-58
2-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting .........................................................................2-59
Procedure 1 Setting Windows Log-ON password .........................................2-60
Procedure 2 Registration of fingerprint..........................................................2-60
Procedure 3 Authentication of fingerprint .....................................................2-67
Procedure 4 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-68
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart ..................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Printer port LED board......................................................................................2-19
Figure 2-3 Function of Printer port LED.............................................................................2-19
Tables
Table 2-1 Battery icon..........................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-2 DC IN icon...........................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-3 Error code ............................................................................................................2-7
Table 2-4 Result code ........................................................................................................2-14
Table 2-5 Printer port LED boot mode status....................................................................2-21
Table 2-6 FDD error code and status.................................................................................2-34
Table 2-7 HDD error code and status ................................................................................2-39
2-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2
2.1 Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 describes how to determine if a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer is
causing the computer to malfunction. The FRUs covered are:
1. Power Supply
2. System Board
3. USB Floppy Disk Drive 8. Modem
4. Hard Disk Drive
5. Keyboard/Dual point
6. Display
7. Optical Drive
11. Wireless LAN
12. Sound components
13. SD Card Slot
14. Fingerprint sensor
.
9. LAN
10. Bluetooth
The Diagnostics Disk operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed Replacement
Procedures are given in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
The following tools are necessary for implementing the troubleshooting procedures:
The following tools are necessary for implementing the Diagnostics procedures:
For tools required for executing the Test Program, refer to the Chapter3. For tools required
for disassembling/assembling, refer to the Chapter 4.
1. A set of tools for debugging port test (test cable, test board, RS-232C cross cable,
display, D port FD)
2. A PC with a serial port (for displaying debug port test result)
3. DOS system FD
4. An external CRT display(for Display trouble shooting)
5. A SD card(for SD card slot trouble shooting)
6. An external microphone(for Sound trouble shooting)
7. Headphone(for Sound trouble shooting)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which FRU malfunctions. Before
going through the flowchart steps, check the following:
‰ Ask the user if a password is registered and, if it is, ask him or her to enter the
password.
‰ Make sure that Toshiba Windows is installed on the hard disk. Non-Toshiba
operating systems can cause the computer malfunction.
‰ Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
‰ Make sure the USB FDD and optical drive are empty.
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the system test, memory test, real timer test, perform the
System Board Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the keyboard test, perform the Keyboard and Dual point
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, perform the Optical Drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the modem test, perform the Modem Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the LAN test, perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test, perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.12.
10. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test, perform the Wireless LAN
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.13.
11. If an error is detected on the sound test, perform the Sound Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.14.
12. If an error is detected on SD card, perform the SD Card Slot Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.15.
13. If an error is detected on Fingerprint sensor, perform the Fingerprint sensor
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.16.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Icons in the LCD Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Icons in the LCD Check
The following Icons in the LCD indicate the power supply status:
‰ Battery icon
‰ DC IN icon
The power supply controller displays the power supply status through the Battery icon and
the DC IN icon in the LCD as listed in the tables below. To check the power supply status,
install a battery pack and connect an AC adaptor.
Table 2-1 Battery icon
Battery icon
Lights orange
Lights green
Power supply status
Battery has been charging and AC adapter is connected.
Battery is fully charged and AC adapter is connected.
Flashes orange
Battery charge is low. The AC adaptor must be connected to recharge
the battery.
Doesn’t light
Any condition other than those above.
Table 2-2 DC IN icon
DC IN icon
Lights green
Power supply status
DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.
There is a problem with the power supply.
Any condition other than those above.
Flashes orange
Doesn’t light
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Error Code Check
If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as
shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Table 2-3 Error code
Error code
Where Error occurs
1*h
AC Adaptor
2*h
3*h
1st battery
2nd Battery
4*h
5*h
6*h
7*h
8*h
9*h
A*h
B*h
C*h
D*h
E*h
S3V output (P60)
1R5-C1V output (P61)
1R5-C1V output (P62)
PPV output (P63:CH0)
PTV output (P64)
E5V output (P65)
E3V output (P66)
PPV output (P63:CH1)
1R35-P1V output (P64)
1R25-P1V output (P65)
2R5-B2V output (P66)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check 1 Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.
‰ AC Adaptor
Error code
10h
Meaning
AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5V.
11h
Express Port Replicator voltage is over 16.5V.
Current from the DC power supply is over 7.00A.
Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.
Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.
12h
13h
14h
‰ 1st Battery
Error code
21h
Meaning
1st battery discharge current over 7.00A..
22h
1st battery discharge current over 3.9A when there is no load.
1st battery charge current is over 3.9A in charging.
Correction value of 0[A] is out of designed value.
1st battery charge current is over 0.3A in not charging.
23h
24h
25h
‰ 3V output (P60)
Error
code
Meaning
40h
45h
S3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is powered on/off.
S3V voltage is 2.81V or less in normal conditions.
‰ 1R5-C1V output (P61)
Error
code
Meaning
50h
51h
52h
53h
54h
1R5-C1V voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up
1R5-C1V voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is suspended.
1R5-C1V voltage is not Normal when the CV support is in Shutdown(s)
state.
55h
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the CV support is booting up
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
‰ 1R5-C1V output (P62)
Error code
Meaning
60h
61h
62h
63h
64h
1R5-C1V voltage is over 2.15V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is suspended.
1R5-C1V voltage is not Normal when the CV support is in Shutdown(s)
state.
65h
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the CV support is booting up
‰ PPV output (P63:MUX- CH0)
Error code
Meaning
70h
71h
72h
73h
PPV voltage is over 1.80V when the computer is powered on/off.
PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is powered on.
PPV voltage is 0.56V or less when the computer is booting up
PPV voltage is 0.56V or more when the computer is powered off.
‰ PGV output (P64:MUX- CH0)
Error code
Meaning
80h
81h
82h
83h
84h
PGV voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.
PGV voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is powered on.
PGV voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is booting up
PGV voltage is 4.50 or more when the computer is powered off.
PGV voltage is 4.50V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ PTV output (P65:MUX- CH0)
Error code
Meaning
90h
91h
92h
93h
94h
PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is powered on.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is booting up
PTV voltage is 0.89 or more when the computer is powered off.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is suspended.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
‰ 1R9-B1V output (P66:MUX- CH0)
Error code
Meaning
A0h
A1h
A2h
A3h
A4h
1R9-B1V voltage is over 2.40V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is booting up
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53 or more when the computer is powered off.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ PGV output (P63:MUX- CH1)
Error code
Meaning
B0h
B1h
B2h
B3h
PGV voltage is over1.62V when the computer is powered on/off.
PGV voltage is 0.68V or less when the computer is powered on.
PGV voltage is 0.68V or less when the computer is booting up
PGV voltage is 0.68V or more when the computer is powered off.
‰ E3V output (P64:MUX- CH1)
Error code
Meaning
B0h
B1h
B2h
B3h
B4h
E3V voltage is over 3.96V when the computer is powered on/off.
E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is powered on.
E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is booting up
E3V voltage is 2.81V or more when the computer is powered off.
E3V voltage is 2.81V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ PTV output (P65:MUX- CH1)
Error code
Meaning
D0h
D1h
D2h
D3h
D4h
PTV voltage is over 1.26V when the computer is powered on/off.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is powered on.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is booting up
PTV voltage is 0.89V or more when the computer is powered off.
PTV voltage is 0.89V or less when the computer is suspended.
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
‰ 1R9-B1V output (P66:MUX- CH1)
Error code
Meaning
E0h
E1h
E2h
E3h
E4h
1R9-B1V voltage is over 2.40V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is booting up
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53 or more when the computer is powered off.
1R9-B1V voltage is 1.53V or less when the computer is suspended.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check 2 In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
‰ Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into
the DC IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected correctly,
go to the following step:
‰ Connect a new AC adaptor and/or AC power cord, if necessary. If the error
still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Check 3 In the case of error code 2Xh:
‰ Make sure the battery pack is correctly installed in the computer. If the
battery pack is correctly installed, go to the following step:
‰ Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the error still exists, go to
Procedure 5.
Check 4 For any other error, go to Procedure 5.
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Connection Check
The power supply wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.
Check 1 Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Check the power cable for
breaks. If the power cord is damaged, connect a new AC power cord. If there is
no damage, go to Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the AC adaptor cord and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the
DC-IN jack socket and AC adaptor inlet/wall outlet, respectively. If these cables
are connected correctly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure the DC IN jack is firmly connected to the connector CN8800 on the
system board.
• If the DC IN jack is not firmly connected, go to Procedure 5.
• If it is connected, go to Check 4.
Check 4 Use a multimeter to make sure the AC adaptor output voltage is close to 15 V. If
the output is several percent lower than 15 V, go to Check 5. If the output is close
to 15 V, go to Check 6.
Check 5 Connect a new AC adaptor or AC power cord.
• If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.
• If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 6.
Check 6 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 4
Charge Check
The power supply may not charge the battery pack. Perform the following procedures:
1. Reinstall the battery pack.
2. Attach the AC adaptor and turn on the power. If you cannot turn on the power, go to
Procedure 5.
3. Run the Diagnostic test, go to System test and execute subtest 04 (Quick charge)
described in Chapter 3.
4. When charge is complete, the diagnostics test displays the result code. Check the
result code against the table below and perform any necessary check.
Table 2-4 Result code
Result code
Contents
The battery is charging normally.
The battery is fully charged.
Check items
Normal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Normal
The AC adaptor is not attached.
The AC adaptor’s output voltage is not normal.
The battery is not installed.
Check 1
Check 1
Check 2
Check 3
Check 4
Check 2
Check 5
The battery’s output voltage is not normal.
The battery’s temperature is not normal.
A bad battery is installed.
Any other problems.
Check 1 Make sure the AC adaptor and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN
socket and the wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, replace the AC
adaptor (and/or AC power cord, if necessary).
Check 2 Make sure the battery is properly installed. If the battery is properly installed, go
to Check 3.
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too hot or cold. Return the temperature to a normal
operating condition. If the battery pack still is not charged, go to Check 5.
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack still is not charged,
go to Procedure 5.
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 5
Replacement Check
The system board processor module may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. Check the
connection between the AC adaptor and system board and connection. After checking the
connections, perform the following Check 1:
Check 1 Replace the AC adaptor with a new one. If the AC adaptor is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps described in Chapter
4, Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the system board and CPU are defective or not
functioning properly. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Printer Port LED Check on Boot Mode
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 1
Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
‰ If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
‰ If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
‰ If DOS or Windows is properly loaded, go to Procedure 3.
Check 1 If one of the following error messages appears on the screen, press F1 as the
message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration preserved in
the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press F1 as the message instructs, returns all system settings to their default
values. Then the system reboots.
If error message (b) appears often when the power is turned on, replace the RTC
battery. If any other error message displays, perform Check 2.
(a) *** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(b) *** Bad RTC battery ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(c) *** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(d) *** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(e) *** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(f) *** Bad check sum (CMOS) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(g) *** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Check 2 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system
stops or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (17), (22) or (23) appears, go to
Procedure 4.
If the error message (18) appears, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting Procedures
in Section 2.7.
If the error message (19), (20) or (21) appears, go to the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
If the error message (21) appears, go to the Optical Drive Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
PIT ERROR
MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR
CMOS BAD BATTERY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
VRAM ERROR
SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
(10) SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(11) EXTENDED MEMORY ERROR
(12) EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(13) DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
(14) DMAC #1 ERROR
(15) DMAC #2 ERROR
(16) PIC #1 ERROR
(17) PIC #2 ERROR
(18) KBC ERROR
(19) HDC ERROR
(20) Built-in HDD ERROR
(21) Select Bay ERROR
(22) TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
(23) RTC UPDATE ERROR
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Serial Port Check (Boot Mode)
Check the D port status by a serial port test. The tool for serial port test is shown below.
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for serial port test
The test procedures are follows:
1. Connect the RS-232C cross-cable to the connector CN34200 of the system board..
2. Connect the RS-232C Cross-cable to the PC that displays the test results.
4. Boot the compute1r in DOS mode.
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)
The D port status is displayed in the following form;
6. When the D port status is FFFF (normal status), go to Procedure 4. When the D port
status falls into any other status than FFFF, go to Procedure 3.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (1/9)
D port
Status
Test item
Contents
Boot Block
Permission of A20 and clear of software
reset bit
Prohibition of APIC
Initialization of MCH, ICH
Initialization of Super I/O
Initialization of debug port (For models
supporting debug port)
Dummy read of 3rd Bus data
Setting of printer port (For models
supporting printer port)
F0B0h
PIT CH0 initialization (for HOLD_ON)
BIOS rewrite factor flag initialization
CHECK SUM CHECK
Transition to protected mode
Boot block checksum (skipped when
returned from S3)
Halts when error occurs
Checksum other than boot block (skipped
when returned from S3)
F0B1h
EC/KBC rewrite check
Key input
If “rewrite” is requested, go to “BIOS rewrite
process”
Transition to system BIOS IRT（when
returned to S3)
”. When a key is pressed, check if it is Tilde
key or Tab key. (skipped when returned from
S3)
F0B2h
F0B6h
Initialization of SC
HLT at LED=B3H or B4, when error occurs
BIOS rewrite request check
If Checksum check error occurred on except
Boot Block or rewrite is required by user, go
to “BIOS rewrite process”.
F0B7h
Transits to System BIOS IRT
BIOS rewrite process
Initialization of ICH. D31
DRAM configuration
Permission of cache (L1 cache only)
Memory clear
Transition to real mode and copy of BIOS
to RAM
2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (2/9)
D port
Status
Test item
Contents
F0B9h
Saving of key scan code
Setting of TASK_1ms_TSC
FAN control
Sound initialization (for BEEP sound)
System speaker permission
Cancel of sound mute
Setting of volume to max (model that can
control volume)
When BIOS, EC/KBC rewriting is
requested
Blinks green (cycle:2s, on:1s, off:1s)
When BIOS ROM is abnormal
Blinks orange (cycle:2s, on:1s, off:1s)
When BIOS renewal is prohibited
Blinks orange (cycle:8s, on:4s, off:4s) HLT
after BEEP is sounded for 30s (LED=BBH))
Key input
Prohibition of USB
BEEP
Waiting for Key input
Reading of
CHGBIOSA.EXE/CHGFIRMA.EXE
FDC RESET
Setting of parameters for 2HD (1.44MB)
Reading of first sector, If it is the data of
1.44MB (2HD), the media type is definite.
Setting of parameters for 2DD (720KB)
Retrieval of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” from the
root directory.
Calculation of directory start head and
sector
Read 1 sector of the root directory
Retrieval of entry of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”
/“CHGFIRMA.EXE” from the sector
read.
Reading of EXE header of
“CHGBIOSA.EXE” and “CHGFIRMA.EXE”
Key input when error occurred
Execution of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE”
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (3/9)
D port
Status
Test item
Message
F100h
Renewal of a microcode （Only
support model）
Prohibition of cache
Permission of L1/L2 cache in
FlashROM area
Initialization of H/W (before
DRAM recognition)
Initialization of MCH
Initialization of ICH6M D30.Func0
Initialization of ICH6M.D31.Func0
Initialization of ICH6M.D31.Func1/2
Initialization of USB Controller
Initialization of ICH6M.D31.Func3
Initialization of ICH6M AC97 Audio
Initialization of TI Controller
Initialization of PIT channel 1
(Setting the refresh interval to “30μs”)
F101h
F102h
Check of DRAM type and size
(at cold boot)
When unsupported memory is connected, becoming
HLT after beep sound
SM-RAM stack area test
HLT when DRAM size is 0
HLT When it can not be used as a stack
Cache configuration
Cache permission(L1/L2 cache)
CMOS access test
(at cold boot)
(HLT when an error is detected)
Battery level check of CMOS
CMOS checksum check
Initialization of CMOS data (1)
Setting of IRT status
(Setting of boot status and IRT busy flag, The rest bits
are 0)
Storing DRAM size in CMOS
Resume branch (at cold boot)
Not resume when a CMOS error occurred
F103h
Not resume when resume status code is not set
Resume error check
S3 returning error (1CH) (Resume error LED=7AH)
SM-RAM checksum check (Resume error
LED=73H)
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (4/9)
Test item
Contents
D port Status
(F103h)
Check of memory configuration change
(Resume error LED=73H)
RAM area checksum check in system BIOS
(Resume error LED=79H)
Expansion memory checksum check
resume error (Resume error LED=76H)
PnP RAM checksum check (Resume
error LED=77H)
Transition to RESUME-MAIN
Reset of CPU clock to low
Prohibition of all SMI
Resume error process
Clearance of resume status
Return to ROM
Turning area of C0000h to EFFFFh to PCI
(Prohibition of DRAM)
Setting of resume error request
(HLT, when error occurs)
Copying ROM/RAM of system BIOS
F105h
SMRAM initia(model supporting built-in
FDD)lization
Check of CPU for HyperThreading
(model supporting HTT)
APIC initialization
WakeUp factor check
SMRAM base rewriting and CPU state
map saving for BIOS
Permission of SMI based on ASMI
F106h
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus initialization.
PIT test (Cold boot only) and initialization
Setting of test pattern to channel 0 of
PIT#0
Check whether the set test pattern can be
read
Initialization of PIT channel 0, Setting of
timer interruption interval to 55ms
Initialization of PIT channel 2, Setting of
the sound generator frequency to 664Hz
Test of PIT channel 1 (Check whether the
refresh signal works normally in 30 micro-
s refresh interval.) HLT, when the time is
out.
Test of PIT channel 2 (Check whether the
speaker gate works normally.)
CPU clock measurement
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (5/9)
D port Status
Test item
Contents
(F106h)
Check of parameter block A
Permission of SMI except auto-off function
Control of excess of rated input power
Battery discharging current control (1CmA).
AC adapter rated over current control
Dividing procedures for time measuring by
IRT
Setting for clock generator
CPU Initialization
Micro code update
Judging of CPU type
Geyserville support check
Setting of CPU clock to “high"
F107h
Saving memory configuration to buffer
Reading of EC version
Update of flash ROM type
Judging of destination (Japan or other
than Japan) based on DMI data
Sets default setting if bad battery or bad
checksum (ROM, CMOS) is detected
CMOS default setting check
ACPI table initialization (for execution of
option ROM)
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus initialization
Setting of IDE device operation mode
Setting of AC’97/Azalia operation mode
Initialization of temperature control
information
KBC initialization
VGA display off, Reset control
Control of built-in LAN permission/
prohibition
PCI Express initialization
Sound initialization
PC multi-box status acquisition (For models
supporting Select Bay)
HC initialization and Device recognition
SD Memory card recognition and
initialization
PIC initialization
PIC test
Password Initialization
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (6/9)
D port Status
Test item
Contents
F108h
PCI bus initialization (connection of DS
Bus)
Initialization of LAN information
WakeUp factor check
F109h
Task generation for waiting INIT_PCI
completion
CMOS data initialization (2)
PnP initialization
Setting of setup items
Waiting for the completion of Multi-box
status check
H/W setting based on resource
Task generation for waiting PnP
resource making completion
F10Ah
Serial interruption control
(It carries out, before using interruption
processing) (Only YEBISU support model)
PnP H/W initialization
PC card slot initialization
SIO initialization (For models supporting
SIO)
FIR initialization (For models supporting FIR)
Making of work for automatic configuration
Acquisition of PCI IRQ
PCI automatic configuration
Configuration
Saving of VGA configuration result
Task generation for waiting
PCI_CONFIGURATION completion
F10Bh
Initialization of H/W needed after PCI
configuration
Printer port setting (model supporting Printer
port)
HDD initialization sequence start
FDD initialization sequence start (model
supporting built-in FDD)
Enabling power off
Output code generation
F10Ch
F10Dh
F10Eh
FIRST_64KB_CHECK
INIT_INT_VECTOR
INIT_NDP
(Check of first 64KB memory)
(Initialization of vectors)
(Initialization of NDP)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (7/9)
D port Status
Test item
INIT_SYSTEM
Contents
F10Fh
(Initialization of system)
Storing of CMOS error information to
IRT_ERR_STS_BUF
Timer initialization start
EC initialization & Reading of battery information
Update of system BIOS (Update EDID information for
LCD)
F110h
INIT_DISPLAY
(Waiting for VGA chip initialization completion, VGA
BIOS initialization)
F111h
F113h
F114h
F115h
F116h
VGA POST
DISP_LOGO
(Logo displaying)
SYS_MEM_CHECK
EXT_MEM_CHECK
INIT_SYS_MEM
(Check of conventional memory) (Boot)
(Exception check in protected mode) (Boot)
(Initialization of conventional memory) (Reboot)
(LED=17h if error occurred during exception check in
protected mode)
F118h
F119h
F11Ah
F11Bh
CHK_DMA_PAGE
CHECK_DMAC
INIT_DMAC
(Check of DMA Page Register) (Boot)
(Check of DMAC) (Boot)
(Initialization of DMAC) (Boot)
CHECK_PRT
(Check of printer existence) (For models supporting
Printer port)
F11Ch
F11Dh
CHECK_SIO
(Check of SIO) (model supporting SIO)
(Check of password)
BOOT_PASSWORD
Waiting for FDD initialization completion (For models
supporting built-in FDD)
(In the case of “Reboot”)
(In the case of “Boot”)
Waiting for HDD initialization completion
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
Initialization of ATA priority
Loading processing of BM (Only model which is
supporting the finger point leader)
Initialization of BM(Only model which is supporting the
finger point leader)
Check of key input during IRT (waiting for KBC
initialization completion)
A password input is performed.
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (8/9)
D port Status
Test item
Contents
(F11Dh)
I/O LOCK Processing (For models supporting I/O LOCK)
Opening of BM (Only model which is supporting the
finger point leader)
F11Eh
F11Fh
EX_IO_ROM_CHECK
PRE_BOOT_SETUP
(Check of option I/O ROM)
Saving of value in 40:00h (For SIO saving/restoring)
Setting of font address for resume password
Setting of repeat parameter for USB KB
Acquisition of keys pressed during IRT
Storing of T_SHADOW_RAM_SIZE
Update of system resource before boot
Rewriting of memory map data of INT15h E820h
function
Waiting for AC-Link initialization completion (For models
supporting AC-Link)
Updating of table for DMI
Copy of ACPI table to top of expansion memory
Waiting for writing of PSC version to BIOS completion
Waiting for clock generator setting completion
When error occurred, halts at LED=21H
Waiting for serial port initialization completion (For
models supporting SIO)
Cancel of NMI Mask
Taking out TIT check sum
Clear of the IRT flag on Runtime side
Update of check sum on Runtime side
Hibernation branch (For models supporting BIOS
Hibernation)
Initialization of Bluetooth (For models supporting
Bluetooth)
Check of existence of object maintenance cards
Prohibition of unused PC cards
Setting Wakeup status data for ACPI
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-5 Serial port (Boot mode) error status (9/9)
D port Status
Test item
Contents
(F11Fh)
HW initialization before Boot, Waiting for
initialization completion
Notifies the DVI connection status to VGA BIOS
(For models supporting DVI)
Setting of battery save mode
Setting of date
Waiting for Bluetooth initialization completion
(For models supporting Bluetooth)
Update of DMI Wakeup factor, Update of SM-
BIOS structure table
PCI device configuration space close
Cache control
Process for CPU (Make the CPU clock to be set
by SETUP)
Waiting of motor-off completion of disabled HDD
Final setting of USB FDD information
Post processing of PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Clears PWRBTN_STS
Enables POWER Button
Clearness of IRT status
F121h
FFFFh
Update of Checksum on
Runtime side
2-28
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.
1. System test
2. Memory test
3. Keyboard test
4. Display test
5. Floppy Disk test
6. Async test
7. Hard Disk test
8. Real Timer test
9. NDP test
10. Expansion test
11. CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
12. Wireless LAN test
13. Sound test
14. LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1 Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If their connectors are in good condition, but there is still a problem, go to Check
2.
Check 2 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-30
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the USB FDD is functioning properly. Perform
the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: USB FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
USB FDD Head Cleaning Check
USB FDD head cleaning operation details are given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run
the test. Clean the USB FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the USB FDD still does not
function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.
If the test program cannot be executed, go to Procedure 3.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-6. Make sure
the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-6 FDD error code and status
Code
01h
02h
03h
04h
06h
08h
09h
10h
20h
40h
60h
80h
EEh
Status
Bad command error
Address mark not found
Write protected
Record not found
Media removed
DMA overrun error
DMA boundary error
CRC error
FDC error
Seek error
Not drive error
Time out error
Write buffer error
Check 1 If the following message appears, disable the write protect tab on the floppy disk.
If any other message appears, perform Check 2.
Write protected
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.
2-32
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The USB FDD is connected to the System Board.
Check 1 When using the USB port, make sure the USB FDD cable is firmly connected to
CN4612 , CN4611 or CN4610 on the System board.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 2.
If any of the connections is damaged, or there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The USB FDD or USB FDD cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with
a new one. If the USB FDD is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the System board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the HDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Partition Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when you execute the HDD
troubleshooting procedures. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy
disks or other storage media.
Procedure 1
Message Check
When the computer’s HDD does not function properly, some of the following error messages
may appear on the display. Start with Check 1 below and perform the other checks as
instructed.
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 5. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
HDC ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
or
IDE #0 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
or
IDE #1 ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Procedure 2. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 3.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....
or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key
Check 3 Make sure the Hard Disk option is set to not used. If it is set to not used, choose
another setting and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 2.
2-34
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Partition Check
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and restart the computer with U key holding down.
Perform the following checks:
Check 1 Type C:and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Check 3.
Check 2 Type FDISKand press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed, go to Check 3. If drive C is not listed, return to
the FDISK menu and choose the option to create a DOS partition on drive C.
Restart the computer from the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk. If the problem still
exists, go to Procedure 3.
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Restart the computer and then go to Procedure 3.
Check 4 Remove the FD and restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.
Check 5 Using the SYS command on the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk, install system
files on the HDD.
If the following message appears on the display, the system files have been
transferred to the HDD. Restart the computer. If the problem still exists, go to
Procedure 3.
System transferred
NOTE: If the computer is running Windows 2000, OSR2 or higher and the hard disk has
more than 512 MB capacity, the FDISK program will ask if you need support for
a partition larger than 2GB. Select Y for large partition support; however, be
sure to read the precaution regarding access by other operating systems.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Format Check
The computer’s HDD is formatted using the low level format program and the MS-DOS
FORMAT program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and perform the other
steps as required.
Check 1 Format the HDD and transfer system files using FORMAT C:/S/U. If the
following message appears on the display, the HDD is formatted.
Format complete
If an error message appears on the display, refer to the Toshiba MS-DOS Manual
for more information and perform Check 2.
Check 2 Using the Diagnostics Disk, format the HDD with a low level format option.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information about the
diagnostic program.
If the following message appears on the display, the HDD low level format is
complete. Partition and format the HDD using the MS-DOS FORMAT command.
Format complete
If you cannot format the HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.
2-36
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed.
Replace the HDD with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. The error codes and statuses are listed in Table 2-7. If an error code is not
generated or the problem still exists, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-7 HDD error code and status
Code
01h
02h
04h
05h
07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
10h
11h
12h
20h
40h
80h
AAh
BBh
CCh
E0h
EEh
DAh
Status
Bad command error
Address mark not found
Record not found
HDC not reset
Drive not initialized
Overrun error (DRQ ON)
DMA boundary error
Bad sector error
Bad track error
ECC error
ECC recover enable
DMA CRC error
HDC error
Seek error
Time out error
Drive not ready
Undefined error
Write fault
Status error
Access time error
No HDD
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 5
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The HDD may be disconnected, or the HDD or the system board may be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the HDD is firmly connected to CN19000 on the system board.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If
there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The HDD may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists, perform Check
3.
Check 3 The System board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-38
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 Keyboard and Dual point Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedure
2.7 Keyboard and Dual point Troubleshooting
To determine if the computer’s keyboard or touch pad is functioning properly, perform the
following procedures. Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Keyboard Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, the keyboard is functioning
properly.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.7 Keyboard and Dual point Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The keyboard, Dual point or sensor/switch board may be disconnected or damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
1. If the keyboard or AccuPoint malfunctions, start with Check 1.
2. If the Dual point malfunctions, start with Check 3.
3. If the power switch, InTouch button or Presentation button malfunctions, start with
Check 5.
Check 1 Make sure the keyboard cable is securely connected to CN3230 on the system
board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The keyboard or its cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 5.
Check 3 Make sure the Dual point cable is firmly connected to CN3240 on the system
board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly. If there is still an error, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The Dual point or the Dual point cable may be damaged. Replace it with a new
one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check 5.
2-40
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 Keyboard and Dual point Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedure
Check 5 The system board may be damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s display is functioning properly.
Start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as instructed.
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Cable Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
External Monitor Check
Connect an external monitor and tun on the computer. If there is no problem on it, the
internal LCD may be defective. Go to Procedure 3. If there is any problem on the external
monitor, the system board may be defective. Go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The Display Test program is stored on the computer’s Diagnostics disk. This program checks
the display controller on the system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the computer’s
floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for details. If an error is detected, go to Procedure 3.
Procedure 3
Connector Check and Cable Check
Check 1 The LCD, FL, FL Inverter Board and System Board are connected by the HV
cable and LCD/FL cable as shown bellow. Check the connections. The
connectors may be disconnected or damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-42
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.8 Display Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If there is still an error,
go to Procedure 4.
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
The FL, FL inverter board, LCD module, and system board are connected to display circuits.
Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, for
instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the following checks:
1. If the FL does not light, perform Check 1.
2. If characters or graphics are not displayed clearly, perform Check 1.
3. If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 2.
4. If the FL remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 4.
Check 1 Replace the FL with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check2.
Check 2 Replace the LCD module with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still exists,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the display cable (FL cable and LCD cable) with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If
the problem still exists, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The display controller on the system board may be damaged. Replace the system
board with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the optical drive (Super Multi drive) in the Slim
Select Bay is functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and
continue with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk.
For the test, prepare test Media.
Then insert the Diagnostics Disk in the computer’s floppy disk drive, turn on the computer
and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the
diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, go to Procedure 2.
2-44
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.9 Optical Drive Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The optical drive (Super Multi drive) is connected to the system board. The connectors may
be disconnected from the system board or may be damaged. Disassemble the computer
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the
following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the drive to test is firmly connected to CN1810 on the system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If there is still
an error, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The drive may be defective or damaged. Replace the drive with a new one. If
there is still an error, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the system board with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s modem is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEEE1394 test program in the USB floppy disk drive,
turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more
information about the diagnostics test procedures.
If any errors occur while executing the Sound/Modem/LAN test, go to Procedure 2.
2-46
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.10 Modem Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Modem is installed as a MDC (Modem Daughter Card). If the modem malfunctions,
there may be a bad connection between the MDC and the system board. Or the MDC, system
board or their connectors might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the MDC is firmly connected to CN3010 on the system board and the
Modem cable is firmly connected to the Modem jack.
If a connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the
modem is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The MDC may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one following the
steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem is still not functioning
properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The modem jack or MDC cable may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the modem
is still not functioning properly, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one
following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting
2.11 LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s LAN is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continue with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the LAN test program available as part of the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394
test program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to
perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The RJ-45 jack with LAN cable is connected to the system board. If the LAN malfunctions,
the system board might be damaged.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures and perform the following check:
Check 1 Make sure the RJ-45 jack is firmly connected to J4100 on the system board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the
LAN port is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The RJ-45 jack may be defective or damaged. Replace the RJ-45 jack with a new
one. If the LAN port is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-48
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Bluetooth is functioning properly.
Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures
as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Check 1 Execute Bluetooth test program. Perform the test following the instructions
described in Chapter 3, Bluetooth Test Program. You will need a second
computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, go to check 2.
Check 2 The Bluetooth module may be defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one.
Then perform the test program again.
If the computer still does not pass the test, go to Procedure 2.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Connection Check
The Bluetooth function wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the Bluetooth module is firmly connected to CN4400 on the sound
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth module is still
not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the Bluetooth antenna cable is firmly connected to the Bluetooth
module.
If the Bluetooth antenna cable is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the Bluetooth
module is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
2-50
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.12 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
The Bluetooth antenna, Bluetooth module, sound board and system board are connected to
the circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1 The Bluetooth module may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
module with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The Bluetooth antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the Bluetooth
antenna with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures. If the Bluetooth is still not functioning properly, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s Wireless LAN is functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antenna Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Transmitting-Receiving Check
Make sure the wireless switch on the left side of the computer is turned “On”. If it is not,
slide the switch toward the back of the computer to turn it on.
Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test
program.
Check 1 Execute test program for the wireless LAN function to check the transmitting-
receiving function of the wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can
communicate by the wireless LAN.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working.
If the computer does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
2-52
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Antenna Connection Check
The wireless LAN wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the wireless LAN board is firmly connected to CN2600 on the system
board.
If the connector is disconnected, connect it firmly. If the wireless LAN board is
still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the wireless LAN antenna cables are firmly connected to the wireless
LAN board.
If the wireless LAN antenna cables are disconnected, connect them firmly. If the
wireless LAN board is still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
The wireless LAN antenna, wireless LAN board and the system board are connected to the
circuits. Any of these components may be damaged. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
Check 1 The wireless LAN board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a
new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check 2.
Check 2 The wireless LAN antenna may be defective or damaged. Replace the antenna
with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the
problem still exists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The system board may be defective or damaged. Replace the board with a new
one following the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and test the
display again.
2-54
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer’s sound functions are functioning
properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other
procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connecor Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Sound test program in the USB floppy disk drive, turn on the computer and run the
test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for details.
If an error is detected, go to Procedure 2.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Connector Check
The sound function-wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following checks:
1. If the speakers do not work correctly, perform Check 1.
2. If the headphone does not work correctly, perform Check 2.
3. If the external microphones do not work correctly, perform Check 3.
4. If the Built in microphones do not work correctly, perform Check 4.
Check 1 If the speakers do not work properly, the speaker cable may be disconnected.
Make sure the speaker cable is firmly connected to CN6170 on the system board.
If the stereo speakers are still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
Check 2 If the headphone does not work properly, the headphone cable may be
disconnected. Make sure the headphone cable is firmly connected to J6310 on the
system board. If the sound function still does not work properly, Procedure 3.
Check 3 If the external microphones do not work properly, external microphone cable may
be disconnected. Make sure the external microphone cable is firmly connected to
J6051 on the system board.
If the external microphones are still not functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
Check 4 If the Built in microphone do not work properly, the Built in microphone cable
may be disconnected. Make sure the Built in microphone cable is firmly
connected to CN6050 on the system board. If the Built in microphone are still not
functioning properly, go to Procedure 3.
2-56
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.14 Sound Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
Check 1 If the speakers do not sound properly, the speaker may be defective or damaged.
Replace it with a new one. If the speakers still do not work properly, go to Check
3.
Check 2 If the Built in microphone do not sound properly, the Built in microphone may be
defective or damaged. Replace it with a new one. If the Built in microphone still
do not work properly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 If the headphone or external microphone does not sound properly, the system
board may be defective or damaged. Replace the system board with a new one.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting
2.15 Bridge media Slot Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the computer's Bridge media functions are
functioning properly. Perform the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with
the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: Check on Windows OS
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Check on Windows OS
Insert a Bridge media (SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card) into the slot. Check if the installed Windows recognizes
automatically the Bridge media and the data in the Bridge media can be read.
If the card is not recognized or data are not red, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Bridge media is connected to IS2140 on the system board.
Bridge media supports SD memory card/SDIO card/Memory stick/Memory stick Pro/
xD Picture card/Multimedia card.
Check 1 Bridge media and system board may be disconnected. Make sure the Bridge
media is firmly inserted to IS2140 on the system board. If not, insert it firmly. If
the Bridge media is still not functioning properly, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Bridge media may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures. If the problem continues, perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the step in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures.
2-58
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
CAUTION: To delete the account for confirming the fingerprint operation, it is
necessary to log on by the account with the management authority. If the
password has been set to log on, ask the Log-ON password to the user.
To check if the Fingerprint sensor works correctly or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
When failed in Procedure 1 to Procedure 3, execute Procedure 4.
Procedure 1: Setting Windows Log-ON password
Procedure 2: Registration of fingerprint
Procedure 3: Authentication of fingerprint
Procedure 4: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: Scan your finger shown below.
1. Lay your finger straight to the sensor and put lightly the first joint of your
finger at the centerline of the fingerprint sensor.
2. Slide slowly your finger from the first joint to fingertip at constant speed.
When not recognized, adjust the speed.
Fingerprint
Fingerprint
sensor
sensor
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Procedure 1
Setting Windows Log-ON password
1. Open [User Account] from [Control Panel].
2. Click [User Account].
3. Click the icon of the account (user’s name) that you want to set the password.
4. Click “Create Account”.
5. Type a password in “Type a new password”.
6. Press Tab key.
7. Type the password again.
8. Click “Create Password” button.
9. When “Do you want to make your files and folders private” appears in [Computer
administrator], click [Yes, Make Private].
Procedure 2
Registration of fingerprint
1. Logon by user’s account to register the fingerprint.
2. Open [Start] → [All Programs] → [Protector Suite QL] → [User Enrollment].
3. After displaying [User Enrollment], click [Next].
2-60
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
[User's Passport] appears in “Enter your password”. Click [Next].
When the finger print has been enrolled, [User’s Password] appears. Slide your finger
enrolled or type the password. Click [Next].
5. Type the Windows logon password in “Enter your password” and click [Next].
[User’s Password] appears.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
6. Confirm that the box of [Run interactive tutorial] is checked (when proceeding wit
seeing Tutorial) and click [Next].
7. Watch the Video carefully, click [Next].
2-62
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
8. Put lightly your finger on the fingerprint sensor at the right side of the touchpad panel
and slide your finger sideways
Slide your finger four times. Four boxes are filled with fingerprints. At this time, when you click the [Replay video], you can
watch the video that you have watched in Procedure 6.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
When you have failed in any time of four times reading and want to practice again,
click [Try again]. When you have fully succeeded in four times of reading, the
message of “Fully succeeded” appears.
9. Click [Next]. The display of [User’s Fingers]
10. Click the box you want to enroll.
2-64
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Put lightly the first joint of your finger you want to enroll on the fingerprint sensor and
slide your finger sideways. Enroll your finger three times. Every time your finger has been
successfully enrolled, one box is checked. When your finger has been successfully
enrolled three times, the message of “Succeeded” appears.
When you do not enroll your finger within two minutes after [User’s Fingerprint] has been
displayed, an error message appears. At the time, click [OK] and enroll your fingerprint.
When you attempt to enroll your finger that has been enrolled, you can not enroll. Enroll
your other finger again.
10. Enroll another finger in Procedure 9. Enroll two fingers at least.
11. The display that recommend you to register a password.
12. Click [OK] in the following display.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
13. Type a backup password two times in the following display. (This password is different
from the password of Windows logon.)
14. Click [Next]. The [Finish] display appears.
15. Click [Finish], “Welcome” display appears.
2-66
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Authentication of fingerprint
1. Turn on the computer to start up Windows.
2. In the Windows logon window, put lightly the first joint of your finger registered and slide
your finger sideways.
When authenticated, [Success] is displayed in the fingerprint authentication display.
When not authenticated well, warning message appears. If you fail continually ten times or
more, you can not use the fingerprint authentication about one minute.
When not authenticated, type the password to logon to Windows.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.16 Fingerprint sensor Troubleshooting
Procedure 4
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The Fingerprint sensor cable is connected to the connector CN9650 on the Fingerprint sensor
board and connector CN9550 on the system board.
Check 1 Check the Fingerprint sensor cable is firmly connected to the connector CN9650
on the Fingerprint sensor board and connector CN9550 on the system board. If
not, connect it firmly. If the Fingerprint sensor is still not functioning properly,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 The Fingerprint sensor cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 3.
Check 3 The Fingerprint sensor board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the
problem persists, perform Check 4.
Check 4 The system board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one.
2-68
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Chapter 3
Contents
3.1
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Diagnostics menu ................................................................................. 3-1
H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool.................................. 3-3
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-3
3.2
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Diagnostics menu (T&D)..................................................................... 3-5
H/W initial information setting tool..................................................... 3-8
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-8
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Setting of the hardware configuration........................................................................ 3-9
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status.................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST................................................................................................... 3-40
3.20.1 Program Description .......................................................................... 3-40
3.20.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-40
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-48
3.21.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-48
3.21.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-48
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-49
3.22.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-49
3.22.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-50
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-51
3.23.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-51
3.23.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-51
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-52
3.24.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-52
3.24.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-53
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-58
3.25.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-58
3.25.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-59
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC)........... 3-60
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)............................................ 3-65
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-73
3.28.1 LAN test ............................................................................................. 3-73
3.28.2 Modem test......................................................................................... 3-76
3.28.3 Bluetooth test...................................................................................... 3-77
3.28.4 IEEE1394 test..................................................................................... 3-79
3.29 Sound Test program................................................................................................. 3-80
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test ......................................................................... 3-80
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test............................................................................ 3-80
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test................................................................... 3-83
3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test ..................................................................... 3-85
3-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP ........................................................................................................... 3-86
3. 30.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-86
3. 30.2 Accessing the BIOS SETUP Program ............................................... 3-88
Tables
Table 3-1 Subtest names .................................................................................................... 3-12
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names.................................................................... 3-35
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents...................................................... 3-38
Table 3-4 Error register contents........................................................................................ 3-39
Table 3-5 Error message.................................................................................................... 3-72
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR)....................................................... 3-73
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT).................................... 3-76
Table 3-8 Common error code ........................................................................................... 3-78
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test programs to test the functions of the
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostics Programs are stored on some Diagnostic
Disks. There are Service Program Modules (DIAGNOSTIC MENU) and the Test Program
Modules (DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU) on the Diagnostic Disk.
The Hardware Initial information Setting Tool consists of some programs which write the
hardware information or displays the current information of the computer. It is also included
in one of Diagnostic Disks.
The heatrun test is automatic test program which executes the some tests successively.
NOTE: Before starting the diagnostics, be sure to follow these steps:
1. Check all cables are connected firmly.
2. Exit any application and close Windows.
3. Check if [All Devices] is selected in the “Device Config.” in SETUP menu.
3.1.1 Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following functions.
‰ DIAGNOSTIC TEST
‰ ONLY ONE TEST
‰ HEAD CLEANING
‰ LOG UTILITIES
‰ RUNNING TEST
‰ FDD UTILITIES
‰ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
‰ POWER OFF
The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following functional tests:
‰ SYSTEM TEST
‰ MEMORY TEST
‰ KEYBOARD TEST
‰ DISPLAY TEST
‰ FLOPPY DISK TEST
‰ PRINTER TEST
‰ ASYNC TEST
［It is not supported ］
‰ HARD DISK TEST
‰ REAL TIMER TEST
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
‰ NDP TEST
‰ EXPANSION TEST
‰ CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
‰ ERROR RETRY COUNT SET
[FDD & HDD]
Other tests are:
‰ Wireless LAN TEST (Wireless LAN TEST disk)
‰ LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST (LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST
disk)
‰ Sound TEST (Sound TEST disk)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
‰ The Diagnostic Disks (T&D for maintenance for Main,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394, wireless LAN and Sound , 3G)
‰ A formatted working disk (Floppy disk test)
‰ USB FDD (for all tests)
‰ A USB test module (USB test )
‰ A USB cable (USB test)
‰ An external CRT monitor (Expansion test)
‰ A CD test media TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK or ABEX TEST CD-ROM
(Sound test)
‰ A DVD test media (DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (Sound test)
‰ A music CD (Sound test)
‰ A store-bought CD-RW media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
‰ A microphone (Sound test)
‰ Headphones (Sound test)
‰ A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
‰ An exclusive modem test jig (Nitto Electric Manufacture Co.,Ltd-made QE2000P01)
(Modem test)
‰ A module cable and RJ11 connector checker (Modem test)
‰ A LAN wraparound connector (LAN test)
‰ PC card wraparound connector (Expansion test)
‰ A display with monitor ID function (Expansion test)
‰ RS232C wraparound connector (Async test)
‰ A PC for wraparound test (Wireless LAN test/Bluetooth test/IEEE1394 test)
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool
The H/W initial information setting tool consists of the following programs.
‰ Initial configuration
‰ DMI information save
‰ DMI information recovery
‰ System configuration display
‰ E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the programs.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3.1.3 Heatrun test program
The heatrun test starts automatically after the selection.
You will need the following equipment to perform this program.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
To start the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB floppy disk drive.
2. Turn on the computer while pressing U key. The following menu appears.
Repair test program
1 Repair Main
2 Repair Initial config set
3 Repair Heatrun
Enter a chose…
To start the Diagnostics menu (T&D), press 1, Repair Main and press Enter.
To start the H/W initial information setting tool, press 2, Repair Initial config set and press
Enter.
To start the Heatrun test, press 3, Repair Heatrun and press Enter.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, it is necessary to execute the followings:
1. Before replacing, save the DMI information by executing subtest 03 DMI
information save in 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration.
2. Before replacing, apply the DMI information by executing subtest 04 DMI
information recovery and subtest 08 System configuration in 3.3 Setting of the
hardware configuration.
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D)
To execute this program, press 1 Repair Main and press Enter in the startup menu, press
Enter. The following menu appears.
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTICS MENU :
1 - DIAGNOSTIC TEST
2 – ONLY ONE TEST
3 -
4 - HEAD CLEANING
5 - LOG UTILITIES
6 - RUNNING TEST
7 - FDD UTILITIES
8 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
9 – POWER OFF
NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is
in progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + C to stop the test program.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
Set the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
will appear:
TOSHIBA personal computer XXXXXX DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1 - SYSTEM TEST
2 - MEMORY TEST
3 - KEYBOARD TEST
4 - DISPLAY TEST
5 - FLOPPY DISK TEST
6 - PRINTER TEST
7 – ASYNC TEST
[It is not supported]
8 - HARD DISK TEST
9 - REAL TIMER TEST
10 - NDP TEST
11 - EXPANSION TEST
12 - CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
88 - ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
Functions 1 through 12 are the Diagnostic Tests. Function 88 sets the floppy disk
drive and hard disk drive error retry count (0-255).
To exit the submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu, set
the highlight bar to function 99 and press Enter.
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When you select 1- SYSTEM
TEST, the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST NAME XXXXXX xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - ROM checksum
04 – Fan ON/OFF
05 - Geyserville
06 - Quick charge
07 – DMI read
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following
message will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES (or NO)
ERROR STOP : YES (or NO)
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.
Selecting YES of TEST LOOP increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle
ends and restarts the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the process to the subtest menu after the test is complete.
Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to “ERROR STOP”.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
Selecting YES of ERROR STOP stops the test program when an error is found and displays
the operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME [[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry
These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found. When an error occurred, the
error status is displayed and one error is added to the error counter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.5 describes the function of each test on the subtest. Table 3-2 in
section 3.18 describes the error codes and error status names for each error.
Details of tests in DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU are described on and after section 3.6. As for
other service programs, refer to section 3.20 to 3.25
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool
After selecting this test, the following menu appears in the display.
###################################################################
######
Repair Initial config set
####
###################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
1 ………………………… Initial configuration
2 ………………………… DMI information save
3 ………………………… DMI information recovery
4 ………………………… System configuration display
5 ………………………… E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
*
*
*
*
*
*******************************************************************
... Press test number [1,2,3,4,5] ?
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.3.
3.2.3 Heatrun test program
After selecting this test, the heatrun test starts executing the same subtest as 3.23 RUNNING
TEST.
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.4.
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
To execute this program, 2, Repair Initial config set and press Enter in the startup menu,
press Enter and follow the directions on the screen. The H/W initial information setting tool
consists of four subtests. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute and press
Enter.
Subtest 1
Initial configuration
This subtest executes the following items and shows their contents in the
display. When an item ends normally, the program proceeds automatically to
the next one. When an error is found, the program stops and waits for key
input. (After solving the problem, the program executes the item again.)
• Setting of the CPU set table
• Setting of the micro code
• Setting of the EHSS
• Inputting and writing of DMI information
When the DMI information is displayed, the following messages appear in
order. Input each information. (If you do not replace the PCB, the DMI
information should not be changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s model
name and press Enter. (e.g. DynaBook)
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
version number and press Enter.
(e.g. PC18070C313S)
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s serial
number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s sales
model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-AAAAA)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
PCN/Bundle number and press Enter.
(e.g. PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed. To write the DMI
information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed. Press Y, then the
DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy disk, etc.
•
•
•
Setting of the HWSC
Setting of the UUID
Display of the DMI information (including UUID)
After completion of the above settings, H/W configuration & DMI
information are appeared in order. Check the contents and press Enter.
Subtest 2
Subtest 3
DMI information save
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest saves all the DMI data in a floppy disk.
DMI information recovery
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest writes all the DMI data in the floppy disk into the new PCB.
NOTE: Since the data of UUID is updated every time when this subtest, DMI information
recovery, is done, the saved UUID data is not written.
Subtest 4
System configuration display
This subtest displays the information of the system configuration.
When the following message appears, confirm the contents and press Enter.
Press [Enter] key
For more details on the system configuration information, refer to “3.25
System configuration”.
Subtest 5
E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
It checks whether the MAC address, GUID of IEEE1394 and DMI
information are written.
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Heatrun Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.4 Heatrun Test
To execute this program, press 3, Repair Heatrun and press Enter in the startup menu, press
Enter.
After selecting this test, the same subtests as 3.23 Running Test are executed successively.
For more details on the procedure and test content, refer to Running Test.
When the heatrun test ends normally, following message appears in the display.
************************************************
HEATRUN NORMAL END
************************************************
Press any key to continue...
Press any key and return to the startup menu.
NOTE: The test result (Errorlog.txt) is stored in the floppy disk. The result is displayed in
the same format as Log Utilities. For more details of the format, refer to 3.22
Log Utilities.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.5 Subtest Names
3.5 Subtest Names
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)
No.
Test Name
SYSTEM
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
ROM checksum
1
01
02
03
04
05
01
02
03
04
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
Conventional memory
Protected Mode
Cache memory (on/off)
Stress
2
MEMORY
3
4
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
Pressed key code display
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
VRAM read/write for VGA
Gradation for VGA
Gradation for LCD
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
All dot on/off for LCD
“H” pattern display
LCD Brightness
LCD EDID Information
External EDID read/compare
5
FLOPPY DISK
01
02
03
04
05
Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Subtest Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)
No.
Test Name
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
6
PRINTER
01
02
03
Ripple pattern
Function
［It is not
supported ］
Wraparound
01
02
03
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
Wraparound (board)
7
8
ASYNC
HARD DISK
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Sequential read
Address uniqueness
Random address/data
Cross talk & peak shift
Partial Read
Write specified address
Read specified address
Sequential write
W-R-C specified address
9
REAL TIMER
01
02
03
Real time
Backup memory
Real time carry
10
11
NDP
01
NDP
EXPANSION
01
02
PCMCIA wraparound [Not supported]
RGB monitor ID
12
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
Sequential read
Read specified address
Random address/data
RW 1point W/R/C
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.6 System Test
3.6 System Test
To execute the System Test, select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
ROM checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.
Subtest 02
Fan ON/OFF
The following message will appear.
Fan number select (1;FAN#1(CPU), 2;FAN#2(GPU)*1, 0; FAN#1)?
To check the CPU fan, press 1 and Enter.
To check the GPU fan, press 2 and Enter.
To check both CPU fan and GPU fan, press 0 and Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start
Make sure the fan does not rotate, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at low speed, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at high speed, then press Enter.
After a while, the fan rotating will stop.
*1 2;FAN#2(GPU)is not supported in this model.
Subtest 03
Geyserville
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 System Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
Quick charge
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.
DMI read
Subtest 05
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following
format.
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***
Model Name
: XXXXXXXXXXX
Version Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX
Serial Number
Model Number
: XXXXXXXX
: XXXXXX-XXXXX
PCN/BND number : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
UUID Number
: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Press [Enter] to EXIT
To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.7 Memory Test
3.7 Memory Test
To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Conventional memory
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB),
then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 02
Protected Mode
NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum
MB), and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 03
Subtest 04
Protected Mode (cache off)
This subtest executes the same way as the subtest 02 with the cache off.
Cache memory (on/off)
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’
data is run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’: ‘Program’ size to ‘7000’:
‘7FFF’ (32 KB)) to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache
memory. One test takes 3 seconds.
Number of misses < Number of hits → OK
Number of misses ≥ Number of hits → Fail
Subtest 05
Stress
Write/Read buffer (1 size = 1B30h) is prepared in the conventional memory.
The data is made in the Write Buffer, the data in Write Buffer is written in the
area of address of 1MB or after. The data is red in the Read Buffer and data is
compared in area up to the maximum size.
Data: FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, 00h,
FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, FFh, 00h, 00h, FFh, 00h,
00h, FFh, FFh, FFh, FFh, 00h, 00h, 00h, AAh
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.8 Keyboard Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.8 Keyboard Test
To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Pressed key code display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps
Lock, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift and Right Shift
keys are displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes,
character codes, and key top names are shown in Appendix E.
KEYBOARD TEST IN PROGRESS 302000
Scan code
Character code =
Keytop
Ins Lock Caps Lock Num Lock
Alt Ctrl Left Shift Right Shift
PRESS [Enter] KEY
=
=
Scroll Lock
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
3.9 Display Test
To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
VRAM read/write for VGA
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The
data is read and compared to the original data.
Subtest 02
Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right
across the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below
appears on the screen, when this subtest is executed.
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03
Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green,
and blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green,
semi-green, blue, semi-blue, white and semi-white. Each color displays for
three seconds.
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Display Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode,
press Enter.
[Mode 12]
[Mode 13]
[Mode 3]
[Mode 111 640*480 64K]
[Mode 112 640*480 16M]
[Mode 114 800*600 64K]
[Mode 115 800*600 16M]
[Mode 117 1024*768 64K]
[Mode 118 1024*768 16M]
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.
(Display example: Mode 12)
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after
displaying the Mode 118.
Subtest 05
All dot on/off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display
changes automatically every three seconds and the screen returns to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
Subtest 06
“H” pattern display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on
error.
Subtest 07
LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright → Bright → Semi-Bright → Bright → Super-Bright
After displaying with Super-Bright of LCD brightness, the screen returns to
the DISPLAY TEST menu.
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD because the
contents of the floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested
and press Enter.
Test start track
(Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
FLOPPY DISK
XXXXXXX
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - Sequential read
02 - Sequential read/write
03 - Random address/data
04 - Write specified address
05 - Read specified address
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during the floppy disk test.
xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXXSTATUS
: XXX
When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen.
Select the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.
Test data ?? (subtest 04 only)
Track No. ??
Head No. ?
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously
reads all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks
(track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared
to the original data.
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to
39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the
original data.
Subtest 04
Subtest 05
Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head
and address.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a track, head and address specified by an
operator.
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Printer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.11 Printer Test
NOTE: Printer Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
NOTE: An IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system to execute this test.
Also, printer port wraparound connector must be connected.
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?
The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports
three printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the
selected subtest.
Subtest 01
Ripple pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while
shifting one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.11 Printer Test
Subtest 02
Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:
Subtest 03
Wraparound
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the
computer’s printer port.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control
and status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector
(34M741986G01). (Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12 Async Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.12 Async Test
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want
to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01 and 02 require the following data format:
Method
Speed
Data
: Asynchronous
: 38400BPS
: 8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
Data pattern : 20h to 7Eh
Subtest 01
FIR/SIR point to point (send)
NOTE: To execute subtests 01 and 02, each computer must have access to the other
computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the
sent data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 02
FIR/SIR point to point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 01 described above. This subtest receives the
data from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR
port.
Subtest 03
Wraparound (board)
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a RS-232C wraparound connector must be connected to
the RS-232C port.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3.13 Hard Disk Test
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter,
and follow the directions on the screen.
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when subtest 02, 03, 04, 06, 08
or 09 is executed. Before running the test, the customer should transfer the
contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard disk. If the customer
has not or can not perform the back-up, create back-up disks as described
below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the
user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.
1. The following message appears for the error dump operation when a data compare
error is detected. Select 1 or 2.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)
2. The following message appears for whether or not the HDC status is displayed on the
screen. The HDC status is described in section 3.19. Select 1 or 2.
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes)
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status
prompt. Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The
following message will appear during each subtest.
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
STATUS
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
: XXX
The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the
fourth digit indicates the head number and the last two digits indicate the sector
number.
The first digit of the STATUS indicates the drive being tested and the last two digits
indicate the error status code as explained in the table 3-2 of the section 3.18.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at
track 0. When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the
maximum track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.
Subtest 02
Address uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-
track. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:
1. Forward sequential
2. Reverse sequential
3. Random
Subtest 03
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This
data is then read and compared to the original data.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
Subtest 04
Cross talk & peak shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a
cylinder and then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder.
(Tests the data interference in the neighbor track.)
Worst pattern data
Cylinder
‘B5ADAD’
‘4A5252’
‘EB6DB6’
‘149749’
‘63B63B’
‘9C49C4’
‘2DB6DB’
‘D24974’
0 cylinder
1 cylinder
2 cylinder
3 cylinder
4 cylinder
5 cylinder
6 cylinder
7 cylinder
Subtest 05
Partial Read
This subtest reads 1GB data which is in minimum, middle and maximum
address of the HDD area.
Subtest 06
Subtest 07
Write specified address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the
HDD.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and
head on the HDD.
Subtest 08
Subtest 09
Sequential write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.
W-R-C specified address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then
reads the data and compares it to the original data.
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14 Real Timer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
3.14 Real Timer Test
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Real time
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time
subtest, follow these steps:
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new
date” prompt and press Enter.
3. The following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new time:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format.
To enter “:”, press Shift + ;. The time is updated.
To exit the test, press Enter.
Subtest 02
Backup memory
This subtest checks the following backup memories:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.14 Real Timer Test
Subtest 03
Real time carry
When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.
CAUTION:
This subtest checks the real time clock increments, making sure the date and
time are displayed in the following format:
Current date : 12-31-1999
Current time : 23:59:58
The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is
displayed:
Current date : 01-01-2000
Current time : 00:00:00
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST
To exit the test, press Enter.
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.15 NDP Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.15 NDP Test
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
NDP
This test checks the following functions of NDP:
‰ Control word
‰ Status word
‰ Bus
‰ Addition
‰ Multiplication
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.16 Expansion Test
3.16 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
PCMCIA wrap around [ It is not supported ]
CAUTION: PCMCIA wraparound test is not supported for this model.
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
‰ Address line
‰ REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
‰ Data line
‰ Speaker line
‰ Wait line
‰ BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:
Sub#
Address
Good
Bad
Contents
Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00
01
00001
00001
nn
nn
xx
xx
02
00002
ww
rr
Data line
ww=write data, rr=read
data
03
04
05
00003
00004
00005
––
40,80
nn
––
xx
xx
Speaker line
Wait line (40<xx<80)
Other lines (BSY#, BVD1)
NN=21, 00
NOTE: Select the subtest number01, The following message will appear:
Test slot number select (1:slot0, 2:slot1, 0:slot0&1)?
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.16 Expansion Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 02
RGB monitor ID
NOTE: To execute this subtest, an external monitor with monitor ID function is required.
Connect the external monitor to the PC for the test of ID acquisition.
The judgment of acquisition is based on the panel data. In simultaneous
display mode or internal display mode, in which the panel data is acquired,
this subtest will fail. Therefore, make sure only the external display is selected
when executing this subtest.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
NOTE: For the subtest 01, 02 and 03, use the TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK TDY-01
or ABEX TEST CD-ROM TCDR-702 and DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1. For the
subtest 04, use a CD-RW on the market.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of one-block units (2K bytes) of all the
logical addresses.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Read specified address
This subtest reads one-block data from a specified address.
Random address/data
This subtest reads one-block data and multi-block data from random addresses
200 times.
Subtest 04
RW 1point W/R/C
This subtest writes, reads and compares data at one point on a CD/RW media.
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 lists the error codes and error status names for the DIAGNOSTIC TEST.
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/3)
Device name
(Common)
Error code
Error status name
Data Compare Error
FF
ROM - CHECKSUM ERROR
System
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
ROM - SERIAL ID WRITE ERROR
ROM - NOT SUPPORTED PS-SYSTEM
ROM - SENSING ERROR(AC-ADAPT)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(1st Batt)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(2nd Batt)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(1)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(2)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(3)
Memory
01
02
DD
RAM - PARITY ERROR
RAM - PROTECTED MODE NO CHANGE'
RAM - CACHE MEMORY ERROR
Keyboard
FE
FD
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
EF
ED
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR (FIRST)
USB - SET ADDRESS ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(Top 8B)
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR (Whole)
HUB - SET CONFIGURATION ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(DESCR.)
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(P ON)
HUB - GET STATUS ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(RESET)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE ERROR
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE1 ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(Enab.)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE2 ERROR
USB - OVER CURRENT ERROR
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR(SECOND)
Display
EE
VRAM SIZE NOT SUPPORT
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/3)
Device name
FDD
Error code
Error status name
01
02
03
04
08
09
10
20
40
80
60
06
EE
FDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
FDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
FDD - WRITE PROTECTED
FDD - RECORD NOT FOUND
FDD - DMA OVERRUN ERROR
FDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
FDD - CRC ERROR
FDD - FDC ERROR
FDD - SEEK ERROR
FDD - TIME OUT ERROR
FDD - NOT DRIVE ERROR
FDD - MEDIA REMOVED
FDD - WRITE BUFFER ERROR
Printer
01
08
10
20
40
80
PRT - TIME OUT
PRT – FAULT
PRT - SELECT LINE
PRT - OUT OF PAPER
PRT - POWER OFF
PRT - BUSY LINE
ASYNC
01
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
88
05
06
RS232C - [DTR ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [CTS ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [RX READY] TIME OUT
RS232C - [TX FULL] TIME OUT
RS232C - PARITY ERROR
RS232C - FRAMING ERROR
RS232C - OVERRUN ERROR
RS232C - LINE STATUS ERROR
RS232C - MODEM STATUS ERROR
SIR - TIME OUT ERROR
FIR - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD
05
07
09
0B
BB
08
01
02
04
10
20
40
80
11
AA
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR
HDD - ECC ERROR
HDD - HDC ERROR
HDD - SEEK ERROR
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (3/3)
Device name
(HDD)
Error code
Error status name
HDD - WRITE FAULT
HDD - STATUS ERROR
HDD - BAD SECTOR
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR
HDD - NO HDD
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR
CC
E0
0A
EE
DA
12
NDP
01
02
03
04
05
06
NDP - NO CO-PROCESSOR
NDP - CONTROL WORD ERROR
NDP - STATUS WORD ERROR
NDP - BUS ERROR
NDP - ADDITION ERROR
NDP - MULTIPLAY ERROR
EXPANSION
C1
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CB
CC
CE
CF
ADDRESS LINE ERROR
CE#1 LINE ERROR
CE#2 LINE ERROR
DATA LINE ERROR
WAIT LINE ERROR
BSY# LINE ERROR
BVD1 LINE ERROR
ZV-Port ERROR
NO PCMCIA
CARD TYPE ERROR
ZV_CONT# ERROR
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
20
40
80
90
B0
BAD COMMAND
ILLEGAL LENGTH
UNIT ATTENTION
MEDIA CHANGE REQUEST
MEDIA DETECTED
ADDITIMAL SENSE
BOUNDARY ERROR
CORRECTED DATA ERROR
DRIVE NOT READY
SEEK ERROR
TIME OUT
RESET ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:
HDC status = XXXXXXXX
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-
digit number. The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status
number and the last four digits are not used.
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the
contents of the HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the
HDC error register.
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BSY
(Busy)
“0” … HDC is ready.
“1” … HDC is busy.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRY
(Drive ready)
“0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.
DWF
(Drive write fault)
“0” … DWF error is not detected.
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.
DSC
“0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.
(Drive seek complete)
DRQ
(Data request)
“0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.
COR
(Corrected data)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.
IDX
(Index)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Index is sensed.
ERR
“0” … Normal
(Error)
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-4 Error register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BBK
“0” … Not used.
(Bad block mark)
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.
6
UNC
“0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.
(Uncorrectable)
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.
5
4
——
Not used.
IDN
“0” … Not used.
(Identification)
“1” … There is no ID field in the requested sector.
3
2
——
Not used
ABT
“0” … Not used.
(Abort)
“1” … Illegal command error or command abort.
1
TK0
(Track 0)
“0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate
command.
“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a
recalibrate command.
0
——
Not used.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3.20.1 Program Description
This program tests the unique functions of this model.
3.20.2 Operations
Select test 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. The following menu appears
in the display.
#################################################################
########
ONLY ONE TEST Menu (XXXXXXXXX)
########
#################################################################
*
*
*
* 1 ............ Pressed Key Display
* 2 ............ Touch Pad / IPS
* 3 ............ Wireless communication switch
* 4 ............ USB Port Select menu
* 5 ............ LED
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 6 ............ Button
* 7 ............ Acceleration sensor
* 8 ............ Docker Dock/Undoc
* 9 ............ Exit to Common Test
*
*****************************************************************
.... Press test number [1-A] ?
Select the subtest number you want to test and press Enter.
To return to the Common Test menu, select 9 and press Enter.
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 1
Pressed key display
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen
changes to the key character that was pressed. Holding a key down enables
the auto-repeat function that causes the key’s display character to blink.
Press Del + Enter to end the test.
NOTE: The actual display may be different from the above image, according to the
model.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
Subtest 2
Touch Pad
This subtest checks the functions of the touch pad as shown below.
A) Direction and parameter
B) Switching function check.
This test displays the response from the touch pad and touch pad switch.
When moving your finger on the touch pad towards the upper left, the
<POINTING> display changes according to the following illustration. If a
touch pad switch is pressed, the <BUTTONS> displays appear on the right side
one by one. The parameters appear above the <BUTTONS> (1) or (2)
corresponding to the pressed touch pad switch highlights. To end this subtest,
press two touch pad switches at the same time.
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
Subtest 3
Wireless communication switch
This subtest checks if the Wireless communication switch works properly.
If the test is started with the switch ON, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch is set to a start position (OFF)
Slide the switch to OFF position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch ON !!
Slide the switch to ON position. Then, following message appears in the
display.
Wireless communication switch OFF !!
After Sliding the switch to OFF position, return to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu automatically.
Subtest 4
USB Port Select menu
NOTE: When executing this subtest, USB test module and USB cable must be connected.
This subtest checks if USB port works properly.
The following menu appears in the display.
################################################################
########
Port Select menu
######
################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 0 ............ Port 0 (right side front)
* 1 ............ Port 1 (right side back)
* 2 ............ Port 2 (Left side)
* 9
*
Exit
****************************************************************
.... Press test number[0-2, 9] ?
Connect the USB test module and USB cable to the computer.
Input the port test number and press Enter.
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without fail.
NG message appears in the display if an error is found during the test.
Confirm the connection of cable, and then execute the test again.
Press 9 and Enter to return to ONLY ONE TEST menu.
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 5
LED
This subtest checks if each LED lights properly.
The following message appears in the display in order. Follow the instructions
in the display to execute the test.
[HDD Access LED test]
Press any key and following message appears in the display.
[Caps/Num/Overlay BT/W-LAN LED test]
(1) Press [Caps Lock ] key ! ...Caps
(on/off)
(2) Press [Fn + F10 ] key ! ...Arrow (on/off)
(3) Press [Fn + F11 ] key ! ...Num
(4) Slide [BT/W-LAN switch L&R]!
(on/off)
(on/off)
Confirm corresponding LED lights properly.
Press Enter and following message appears in the display.
Check [DC-IN]&[Power]&[Main Battery]LED= Green
Check if the color of the message changes orange to green alternately.
Press Enter and return to the ONLY ONE TEST menu.
Buuton
Subtest 6
This subtest checks the moving of the of the front operation panel button.
Press the Toshiba Assist button after the following message appears.
Step 1
X
*
1
2
*
*.
Press Function button (Assist button )
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without an error.
Press any key return to each Steps if NG! or Press any key message apprears.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
Press the Toshiba Presentation button after the following message appears.
Step2
X
*
1
2
*
*.
Press Function button (Presentation button)
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without an error.
Press any key return to each Steps if NG! or Press any key message apprears.
If the test ends successfully, the display returns to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu.
Subtest 7
Acceleration sensor
This subtest detects and corrects the each axis (X, Y, Z).
NOTE: Make sure that this subtest is executed on the following condition:
1. Flat desk with vertical plane to get the stability of machine.
2. The vertical wall or plane is necessary.
3. Prevent the machine from shake or shock.
<Example>
Set the machine
against the vertical plane
Vertical plane
with the Front upward
Flat desk
The figure below shows the name and position of each side.
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Top
(heaven surface)
Right side
Back
Front
Left side
When this subtest is selected, the following message appears in the display.
The heaven surface establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
NOTE: Be sure to execute the test with the display panel opened.
Set the machine on the flat desk. Then press Enter to detect the data on this
setting of machine. The following message appears in the display.
The back establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the back of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The right establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the right side
of machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The front establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the front of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The left establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the left side of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 ONLY ONE TEST
When there is no defective during the all checks above, the following message
appears in the display. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test
menu.
** Setting OK! **
Press [Enter] key
When any trouble in the above setting is found, the following message appears
and the test halts. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test menu.
** Setting ERROR! **
Press [Enter] key
Subtest 8
Docker Dock/Undock
This subtest is executed with an Express Port Replicator installed.
Press Enter while pushing the eject button of the Express Port
Replicatorafter the following message appears.
Slide Eject-SW, and press [Enter] Key
Press Enter without pushing the eject button of the Express Port Replicator
after the following message appears.
Release Eject-SW, and press [Enter] Key
If the test ends successfully, the display returns to the ONLY ONE TEST
menu.
When the display returns to the ONLY ONE TEST menu, remove the Express
Port Replicator from the computer.
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.21 Head Cleaning
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.21 Head Cleaning
3.21.1 Function Description
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.21.2 Operations
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press
Enter.
3. When the “cleaning start” message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.
TECRA A8 /Satellite Pro A120 Maintenance Manual (960-573)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22.1 Function Description
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the results
in RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk, or output the data to a printer or the
display.
The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)
3. Pass count (PASS)
4. Error status (STS)
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
6. Write data (WD)
7. Read data (RD)
8. HDC status (HSTS)
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.22 Log Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22.2 Operations
1. Select 5 and press Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, the error information is
displayed in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR WDRDHSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]
001 FDD 02 0000 103 00001 00000000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
001 FDD 01 0000 180 00001 00000000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR
Address
Error status
HDC status
Pass count
Read data
Subtest number
Error status name
Write data
Test name
Error count
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]
2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following
number keys:
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK”, a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the
error status. However, it is not added to the error count.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.23 Running Test
3.23 Running Test
3.23.1 Function Description
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1. System test (subtest 01)
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02)
3. Display test (subtest 01)
4. Real timer test (subtest 02)
5. HDD test (subtest 01)
6. FDD test (subtest 02)
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer
for the FDD test.
3.23.2 Operations
NOTE: After booting up the Running test, pull out the test program and insert a floppy
disk which has been formatted by FORMAT command of DOS.
1. Pull out the test program and insert a floppy disk which has been formatted by
FORMAT command of DOS.
2. Select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter, the following messages
for selectable tests will appear in the display in order.
FDD write/read test (Y/N) ?
Printer wrap around test (Y/N) ?
Serial wrap around test (Y/N) ?
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM read test (Y/N) ?
3. To execute the test, press Y and Enter. To cancel the test, press N and Enter. If you
select the selectable tests, follow the instruction message in the display.
4. After selecting the selectable tests, the running test starts automatically. To terminate
the program, press Ctrl + Break.
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.1 Function Description
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the
FDD and HDD.
1. FORMAT
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. It is different from the
Toshiba DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode,
512 bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of
the hard disk on the display.
4. HDD ID READ
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays hard disk information.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.2 Operations
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following message.
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1 - FORMAT
2 - COPY
3 - DUMP
4 – HDD-ID READ
9 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message.
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?
(b) Select a drive number to display the following message.
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the
one below will be displayed.
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press
any key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]
After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear.
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test
to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears.
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?
(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one
below.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press
any key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has
started.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
= XXX
= X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(d) The following message will appear.
Insert target disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and
press any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the
target disk.
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the
message from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been
copied, the following message will appear.
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears.
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?
(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDDis selected, the display will go to step (h). If
1:FDDis selected, the following message will appear.
Select drive number (1:A, 2:B) ?
(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
Format type select (1:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(d) If 3:2HDis selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?
(e) The following message will appear.
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear.
—— Max. address ——
[Track ] = XXXX
[Head ] = XX
[Sector] = XX
Track number ????
(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k)
will appear.
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDDin (a).
Select drive number (1:C, 2:D) ?
(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
---Max. address ---
[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX
LBA number ????????
(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and
dump a list.
3-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?
(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD
UTILITIES MENU.
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?
5. HDD ID READ program
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration.
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #1]
Model No.
= XXXXXXX
Press [Enter] key
Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25 System Configuration
3
3.25 System Configuration
3.25.1 Function Description
NOTE: To display the system configuration, the write protect tab should be OFF
position. If the tab is ON position, move the tab to OFF position and restart the
test. Otherwise the correct information cannot be acquired.
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type [Code/L2 cache]
2. Chip set [VRAM]
3. BIOS ROM version [1st ID, 2nd ID]
4. Boot ROM version
5. EC total version
6. PS Microprocessor version
7. SVP Par. version
8. Microcode Revision
9. Total Memory Size [Conventional memory]
10. Battery code
11. HWSC
12. FSB [Voltage]
13. 0 Printer Adapter
14. 1 ASYNC Adapter
15. 1 Math co-processors
16. 1 Floppy Disk Drive [Track/Head/Sector]
17. 1 Hard Disk Drive [Sector/Drive size/Manufacture code]
18. ODD Drive
19. T&D total version
3-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.23
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25.2 Operations
Select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. Then, the following system
configuration appears in the display.
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]
* - Processor Type
* - Chip set
* - BIOS ROM Version
* - BOOT ROM Version
* - EC Total Version
* - PS Micon Version
* - SVP Par. Version
* - Microcode Revision = VX.XX
* - Total Memory Size = XXXXXXMB (Conventional Memory = XXXKB)
* - Battery Code
* - HWSC
* - FSB
= XXXXXX-XXXXXMHz
= XXXXXX
Code = XX
L2 Cache = XXXXXKB
VGA Chip = Intel Corp
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
(Panel = XXXX*XXXX Menu=XXXX Prod=XXXX))
(Processor = XXXh)
= XXXXXXXXXXXX
= XXXXXXX
= XXXXXMHz (Voltage = XXh)
(Present voltage = XXXX)
* - X Printer Adapter
* - X ASYNC Adapter
* - X Math CO-Processor
LPT1 = XXXX LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX
COM1 = XXXX COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX
* - X Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX
* - X Hard Disk Drive(s)
#1 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
#2 Sectors = XXXXX, (XXXXX GB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
= XXXXXXXXXXXX
* - ODD Drive
* - T&D Total Version = VX.XX
Press [Enter] Key [Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]
Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC)
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up
of REF PC)
For the test of Intel-made wireless LAN cards, configure the test environment as shown
below with the following equipment.
・
AP （which can operate on Windows XP and is corresponding to access point
11a, 11b and 11g）
NOTE: Set the SSID of AP as follows. (Note that upper case and lower case
characters are recognized as different characters.)
AP for check of 11a : 11aAP
AP for check of 11b : 11bAP
AP for check of 11g : 11gAP
Make the security functions of AP (WEP, WPA, etc.) invalid.
・
・
・
REF (Reference) PC
Cross cable
DUT (Device Under Testing)
Cross cable
DUT
(Device Under
Testing)
REF
(Reference PC)
11a(b,g)AP
Configuration of equipment for transmitting-receiving test
How to setup the REF PC
Set up the wireless LAN environment needed for the test before the start of Responder
program on REF PC.
1. Copy the R100VWL5.ZIP (wireless LAN program for maintenance, common to
Calexico, Golan and Kedron) to REF PC and unzip it. Then “Clx_Res” folder is
created and the following three programs are copied in it.
•
•
•
PACKET.SYS
PACKET.INF
WTWINSVR.EXE
3-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
2. Open “My Computer” window and click “My Network places” on the left column.
3. Click “View network connections” on the left column.
4. The “Network Connections” window appears. Double-click “Local Area Connection”.
Network Connections window
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC)
5. Click “Install…” button on the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
Local Area Connection Properties window
6. Select “Protocol” on the “Select Network Component Type” window and click
“Add…” button.
Select Network Component Type window
7. Click “Have Disk…” button on the “Select Network Protocol” window.
Select Network Protocol window
3-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC) 3 Tests and Diagnostics
8. When “Install From Disk” window appears, click “Browse…” and specify the created
“Clx_Res” folder. Then Click “OK”. (For the test, “PACKET.INF” file is used.)
Install From Disk window
9. The “Select Network Protocol” window appears again. In the “Network Protocol”,
“DDK PACKET Protocol” will appear. Then click “OK” to start the installation.
Select Network Protocol window
10. When the installation is completed, “Local Area Connection Properties” will appear.
Confirm that the “DDK PACKET Protocol“ is added. Click “Close” button to finish
the setup of REF PC.
Local Area Connection Properties window
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g, a/b/g Setting up of REF PC)
After the completion of REF PC setup, restart the WINDOWS. Then perform the Responder
test program for Windows (WTWINSVR.EXE) in the Clx_Res folder.
・WTWINSVR.EXE
Function
: Transmitting/receiving of data to/from DUT via AP
OS available : Windows XP only
How to start : Double-click WTWINSVR icon.
How to start
1. Double-click wtwinsvr icon. The following screen will appear.
Startup screen of wtwinsvr program
2. Enter the number of Network Adapter used on REF PC (enter 1 for example
above). Then the following screen will appear. Start the test program on DUT.
Screen while running the wtwinsvr program
The REF PC is waiting for the start of the test program on DUT.
3-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
3.27.1 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made :Golan) on DUT PC
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made 802.11 b/g or 802.11 a/b/g Golan). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the
Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Intel PRO/Wireless XXXABG Network Connection
Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
*
*
3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
*
4 : Communication test of 11a mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5 : Communication test of 11g mode
6 : All the tests of 11a/b/g Card
(SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test)
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-6):
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Module : Intel PRO/Wireless XXXXABG
Network Connection (Mow1)
G-code : G360001U110
TA No. : D26539
*************************************************************
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
Press any key and return to the test menu. If a defective is found during the
test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest02
MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
***********************MAC CHECK*****************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
***********************MAC CHECK*****************************
ERROR: MAC all F
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
3-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest03
Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the
main antenna first. If a defective is not found during the test,
transmitting/receiving test in 802.11b mode using the AUX antenna is
automatically executed.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message (which antenna is defective) is
displayed
**************************************
*
*
*
*
* Main Antenna Test : NG !!
*
**************************************
**************************************
*
*
*
*
* Aux Antenna Test : NG !!
*
**************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
Subtest04
Communication test of 11a mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11a mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
Subtest05
Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11g mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest06
All the tests of 11a/b/g Card
All the tests is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address
Check, Communication test of 11b mode, Communication test of 11a mode
and Communication test of 11g mode.
When any error has detected, the test finishes.
3-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27.2 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made:Kedron) on DUT PC
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made 802.11 a/b/g or 802.11 a/b/g/n: kedron). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the
Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Intel PRO/Wireless XXXABG Network Connection
Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
*
*
3 : Communication test of 11a mode
4 : Communication test of 11b mode
5 : Communication test of 11g mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
6 : All the tests of Wireless WiFi Link 4965 Module *
(SKU & MAC Check, communication test)
*
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-6):
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Module : Intel PRO/Wireless XXXXABG
Network Connection (Mow1)
G-code : G360001U110
TA No. : D26539
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu. If a defective is found during the
test, NG message will appear in the display.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest02
MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
***********************MAC CHECK*****************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
***********************MAC CHECK*****************************
ERROR: MAC all F
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest03
Communication test of 11a mode
3-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11a mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again
Communication test of 11b mode
Subtest04
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11a mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27Wireless LAN Test Program on DUT PC(Intel-made)
Subtest05
Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest execute transmitting/receiving test in 802.11g mode using the
main antenna.
If a defective is not found during the test, OK message will appear in the
display. Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
When pressing any key, the following message is displayed
********************************************
*
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !! *
*
********************************************
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Subtest06 All the tests of Wireless WiFi Link 4965 Module
All the tests is executed in the order of SKU check of Module, MAC Address
Check, Communication test of 11a mode, Communication test of 11b mode
and Communication test of 11g mode.
When any error has detected, the test finishes.
3-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
This section describes how to perform the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test with the
test program.
Insert the test program disk for LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test in FDD and turn on
the power. The following message will appear:
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
----------------------------------
1. LAN
2. Modem
3. Bluetooth
4. IEEE1394
Enter a choice:
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
NOTE: It is impossible to go back to startup menu once you choose the test. Therefore,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test can not be executed successively.
3.28.1
LAN test
To execute LAN test, press 1 and Enter. The following message will appear:
####################################################################
######### i82562 ICHx GbE (i82540) Diagnostics program
#####
####################################################################
*
*
* 1 ............ (i82562 + ICHx)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 2 ............ (GbE)
*
* 3 ............ (Marvel)
*
********************************************************************
.... Press test number [1-2] ?
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Subtest01
(i82562 + ICHx)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip.
The following message will appear:
[LAN transmit & receive test !]
COMPLETED Repeat count =
Error count =
00000
00000
LOOPBACK TEST
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
Destination Address
Source Address
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **
< TRANSMIT >
< RECEIVE >
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
3-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
(GbE)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip. Select 2 to execute and press Enter.
The following message will appear:
Testing adaptor...hit <ESC> to abort.
*
External Loopback Test...PASSED
Testing completed.
*
*
Loopback Test Complete
*
*
* 1000Base Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
*
* CE Test Complete
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
Subtest03
(Marvel)
NOTE: This Subtest is not supported in this computer.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3.28.2
Modem test
For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness. Use the
dedicated “FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01 made by Nitto Denki
Seisakusyo)” for the tests.
NOTE:
Modem test is not supported for this model.
##################################################################
###### AC97' Modem Controller Diagnostics program #######
##################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............ (ICHx)
2 ............ (ICH6)
*
*
*
*
******************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-2] ?
To execute Modem test, press 2 and Enter. Following message will appear:
[Modem loopback test !]
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)
Version X.X
* Scorpio Modem Initialize
* Digital Loopback Test
:OK
:OK
* RJ11 Connector Check (LED)
:(Operator’s Check!!)
OK is displayed when a error is detected, NG is display when a error is not detected.
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check LED) test will be executed, and the
following message will appear:
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)
If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y, otherwise, press N.
3-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28.3
Bluetooth test
Preparation
・ For the test of Bluetooth function, use the Windows program installed on the target
computer (computer to be tested). A responder device (device for transmitting/receiving
data) is also needed. (A mobile phone with the Bluetooth function is also available.)
・ A Bluetooth card should be installed on the target computer. Install the Bluetooth
function by clicking [All Programs] -> [TOSHIBA] -> [Bluetooth] -> [Bluetooth Settings].
Test procedure
1. Enable the Bluetooth function of the responder device.
2. Make sure the wireless communication switch of the target computer is set to “ON”
position.
3. Right-click the Bluetooth icon on the lower right screen of the target computer.
4. Select “Options…”.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
5. Select “Diagnostics” tab and click “Run”.
6. Check the “Log” to confirm the test result.
BT address of test computer
BT address of responder
device
7. When the BT (Bluetooth) address of the responder device appears, the Bluetooth card
and antenna connection are OK.
If the BT address of the responder device does not appear, check the Bluetooth card
condition and antenna cable connection to the Bluetooth card by disassembling the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
3-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-631)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28.4
IEEE1394 test
To execute this test, press 4 and Enter.
NOTE:
NOTE:
IEEE1394 test is not supported for this model.
Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a
reference machine to perform this test.
The following menu will appear:
********************************************************************
********
IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program
**************
********************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ....(Transmit & Receive test)
2 ....(Responder set)
3 ....(1394 GUID Display)
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3] ?
To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest01
Transmit & Receive test
NOTE:
Before executing subtest 01, be sure to execute subtest 02 in the responder
machine.
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and
target machine and compare them with the original data through the
IEEE1394 cable.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Responder set
This program is executed in the responder machine to initialize the responder
machine with the IEEE1394 cable connected to the target machine before
executing subtest 01.
1394 GUID Display
This program checks the GUID of IEEE1394.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
3.29 Sound Test program
This section describes how to perform the Sound test. To execute the sound test, refer to the
following description.
Prepare a HDD and format it on DOS. Copy all files in the floppy disk in which the Sound
test program is stored to the HDD. Reboot the computer from the HDD. The following
message will appear:
###############################################################
######
WSS, Sound blaster pro Diagnostics program
#####
###############################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............ Sound (Standard)
2 ............ Sound (Legacy)
3 ............ CD Sound (Standard)
4 ............ CD Sound (Legacy)
---It outputs at the speaker and lineout---
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-4] ?
Input the test number and press Enter.
3.29.1 Sound (Standard) test
To execute the Sound (Standard) test, press 1 and Enter. The following menu will appear in
the display.
###############################################################
######
ICH4-M + AD1981A Diagnostics program
######
###############################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............
2 ............
3 ............
( Microphone recording & play )
( Sine wave )
( Line IN recording & play )
9 ............
Exit to Main
***************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3, 9] ?
3-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
To return to the Sound test menu, press 9 and Enter. Then following message will appear in
the display.
***********************************
******** May I Restart ? *******
***********************************
Press any key to continue…
After pressing any key, the machine starts rebooting and sound test menu will appear in the
display.
Subtest 01
Microphone recording & play
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D, D/A converter.
When this subtest is selected, the following message will appear.
[Recording & play test !]
And the following message will appear.
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version X.XX
Copyright (c) Tenberry Software, Inc. XXXX
After this message appears, display stops briefly. In this timing, sound is
recorded from internal microphone.
After the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded
after the following message.
STACWAVE Version X.XX
Build data: XXX XX XXXX at XX:XX:XX
Loading “mic.wav”.
NOTE: The message in the display might have slight difference from those above.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
Subtest 02
Sine wave
This subtest is executed by loading the COM file (ADSIN.COM). The
program expands sine wave data table from 16KB to 64KB, and creates the
play data. Then it transfers the data between the DMA and the CODEC to
play the sine wave. (It sounds like a continuous beep). By using wave
measurable devices such as an oscilloscope, the data can be measured as a
sine wave.
When the subtest is executed, the sine wave is played while expanding sine
wave from 16KB to 64KB.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
Line IN recording & play
Subtest 03
This subtest executes the same test as the subtest01 by recorded sound from
the different port (Line-in port).
For more details on the subtest, refer to the subtest01 Microphone recording &
play.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
3.29.2 Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the Sound (Legacy) test, select 2 and press Enter.
NOTE: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
3-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29.3 CD Sound (Standard) test
To execute the CD Sound (Standard) test, press 3 and Enter. Insert the test media
(TOSHIBA TEST CD-ROM or ABEX TEST CD-ROM) or music CD on the market (if the
test media can not be prepared). Following menu appears in the display.
For details on use of test media, refer to 3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media).
For details on use of audio CD on the market, refer to 3.29.3.2 Audio CD.
3.29.3.1 Test media (Toshiba-made test media)
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
01 – Japanese Narration
02 – English Narration
03 – Test Tone A (100Hz – 20Hz)
04 - Test Tone B (400Hz – 3KHz L-R)
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Subtest 01
Japanese Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in Japanese starts and following message
appears in the display.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <Play stop>.
Press any key and stop the narration. Then return to the CD Sound (Standard)
test menu.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Sound Test program
Subtest 02
English Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in English starts.
For more details on the procedure, refer to the subtest01.
Test Tone A
Subtest 03
CAUTION: Before starting subtest03, be sure to set the sound at proper volume.
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 100Hz to 20Hz.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
Subtest 04
Test Tone B
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 400Hz to 3KHz
and also changing the channel from left speaker to right speaker.
The test returns to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
CAUTION: This model does not support the CD Sound (Standard) test.
3-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29.3.2 Audio CD
Insert an audio CD and the following menu appears in the display.
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
CD Sound track number (01-98 : Track) ?
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Select the track number you want to test and press Enter twice.
The following message appears in the display and selected track is played.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <play stop>
After pressing any key, the music stops and the display returns to the selection menu of the
track number.
NOTE:
When the CD-ROM test is executed, [ALL DEVICE] must be selected in the
“Device Config.=” of the BIOS SETUP. If the “ALL DEVICE” is not selected,
music can not be played.
3.29.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the CD Sound (Legacy) test, select 4 and press Enter.
CAUTION: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3.30.1 Function Description
This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
(a) Total
2. System Date/Time
(a) Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
(b) Time (HH:MM:SS)
4. Password
(a) User Password
(b) Supervisor Password
5. HDD Password
(a) HDD
(b) HDD Password Mode
(c) User Password
(d) Master Password
6. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) HDD Priority
7. Others
(a) Core Multi-Processing
(b) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
(c) Execute-Disable Bit Capability
(d) Virtualization Technology
(e) Auto Power On
(f) Beep Volume
(g) Diagnostic Mode
3-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
8. Configuration
(a) Device Config.
9. Battery
(a) Battery Save Mode
(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
(c) Enhanced C-States
10. I/O ports
(a) Serial
11. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) Select Bay
12. PCI Bus
(a) PCI Bus
13. Display
(a) Power On Display
14. Peripheral
(a) Internal Pointing Device
15. Legacy Emulation
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
(c) USB Memory BIOS Support Type
16. PCI LAN
(a) Built-in LAN
17. Security Controller
(a) TPM
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3.30.2 Accessing the BIOS SETUP Program
Turn on the power while pressing ESC, the following menu appears.
Check system. Then press [F1] key.
Then press F1. The following display appears.
3-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press Å and Æ to move between the two columns. Press ↑ and ↓ to move between
items in a column. Press Fn+↑ (PgUp) and Fn + ↓ (PgDn) to move between the
two pages.
2. Press either the Space bar or Back Space to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
If the changed item does not require the system to reboot, the following message is
displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
If the changed item requires the system to reboot, the following message is displayed:
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
NOTE: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes. When SETUP is displayed
at the next time, the current configuration appears.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. Press End and then press Y to accept the factory preset settings.
NOTE: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
Password
Execute-Disable Bit function
3-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into functionally related groups. This section describes each
group and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
(a) Total
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Use this option to set the computer’s system date/time.
(a) Date
Use this option to set the system date of the computer.
(b) Time
Use this option to set the system time of the computer.
3. Password
(a) User Password
This option allows you to set or reset the user password for power on.
Registered
A password has been registered.
Not Registered Change or remove the password. (Default)
(c) Supervisor Password
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen, allows you
to register a Supervisor Password of the computer.
Registered
Supervisor Password has been registered.
Not Registered Supervisor Password has not been registered (Default).
For details on setting the password, refer to the Online Manual.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
4. HDD Password
This option sets HDD password. HDD password is a security function to protect the
built-in HDD.
(a) HDD
This item selects the hard disk to set HDD password.
Built-in HDD
Sets HDD password for the built-in HDD
(b) HDD Password Mode
This item registers HDD password and can be selected only for registering
HDD password. To change HDD Password Mode when HDD password is
registered, delete the registered HDD password first, and then register new
password.
User Only
Sets only User HDD Password (Default)
Master+User
Sets Master HDD Password and User HDD Password
(c) User Password
This item sets User password.
For details on setting user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
(d) Master Password
This item sets the Master HDD password.
This can be set Master+User is set in the HDD password Mode. For details,
refer to the User’s Manual.
3-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
5. Boot Priority
This tab sets the priority for booting the computer and the priority for the built-in
HDD or optional secondary HDD.
(a) Boot Priority
HDD→FDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, FDD, CD-
ROM and LAN. (Default)
FDD→HDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, HDD, CD-
ROM and LAN.
HDD→CD-ROM→LAN→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: HDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and FDD.
FDD→CD-ROM→LAN→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: FDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and HDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→HDD→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
HDD and FDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→FDD→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files
in the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
FDD and HDD.
NOTE: CD-ROM refers to a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive.
(b) HDD Priority
This option enables to select the priority for the Built-in HDD, Second HDD
or USB.
Built-in HDD→ Second HDD→USB (Default)
Second HDD→Built-in HDD→ USB
Built-in HDD→ USB →Second HDD
Second HDD→ USB →Built-in HDD
USB →Built-in HDD → Second HDD
USB → Second HDD →Built-in HDD
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
7. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends
primarily on the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Core-Multi Processing
NOTE: This is not displayed in PCs with a single core CPU.
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Core Multi-Processing functions. (Default)
Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.
(b) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Intel SpeedStep technology. When the computer is
in use, the CPU power consumption and clock speed are
automatically switched when necessary. (Default)
Always High
Always Low
Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at its fastest speed.
Disables Intel SpeedStep technology and always runs the
processor at low power consumption and low speed.
(c) Execute-Disable Bit Capability
Selects the function to reports whether the CPU Execute-Disable Bit is
available or not to OS. When the CMOS is damaged, the default is Available.
When Home is pressed, the setting is not changed and the setting is kept.
Available
Reports that the function is available. (Default)
Reports that the function is not available.
Not Available
(d) Virtualization Technology
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization
Technology installed in the CPU.
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to
operate as multiple virtual machines.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Virtualization Technology.
Disables Virtualization Technology. (Default)
3-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Virtualization Technology
(e) Auto Power On
Use this option to set a time and date for automatic power on and enable or
disable the ring indicator feature. Alarm Date Option appears only when
Alarm Time is enabled.
OPTIONS
Alarm Time
= 00:00:00
= Disabled
= Disabled
= Disabled
Alarm Date Option
Wake-up on LAN
on Battery
Critical Battery Wake-up = Enabled
Set the parameters for the Auto Power On (automatic power on) function and
the Wake-up on LAN in the “OPTIONS” window. To set the time, use Space
or BackSpace. Press ↓ to move the cursor to the right and ↑ to move the
cursor to the left when you set the date and time.
For the Alarm Time, set the time to turn on the power automatically. The
“second” cannot be set. When it is set to “Disabled”, the time to turn on
automatically is not set.
The Wake-up on LAN is a function to turn on the power automatically by the
call from the administrator. It can be set to “Enabled” only when “Built-in
LAN” is set to “Enabled”. To activate this function, use the AC adapter.
On Battery
The following settings can be changed when the Wake-up on LAN is Enabled.
Enabled
Disabled
Wake-up on LAN function whenoperating from the battery.
Wake-up on LAN function whenoperating from the battery
(Default).
NOTE: 1. Do not remove the AC adapter and battery pack at the same time when you use
this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume function will be lost. You
must also reset this option.
2. When a password is set in Password Security, the system is in standby mode,
the Timer on function (Auto Power PN) is set and the system is booted,
“Password =” is displayed. When the password set in Password Security is
input, the computer returns to Windows from standby mode.
3. This function is effective only once, it is released after booting up.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
Critical Battery Wake-up
Configures what action is taken when the remaining battery power is close to
running out while the system is in Sleep Mode. This setting is only available
when the Critical battery action within Power Options in Windows is set to
Hibernate. (Default)
The operation of this function is dependent upon battery status.
Note: The Critical Battery Wake-up only operates with Windows Vista™.
Enabled
When the remaining battery power is about to run out while
the system is in Sleep Mode, the system is automatically
woken up and then switched to Hibernation Mode
(Default).
Disabled
Warning
No action is taken even if the remaining battery power is
about to run out while the system is in Sleep Mode.
Turning off your computer where electronic devices are
regulated or controlled. When you have to turn off your
computer aboard an aircraft or in places where electronic
devices are regulated or controlled, always shut down the
computer completely or put the computer into Hibernation
Mode instead of allowing it to go into Standby Mode
(Sleep Mode) and turn off any wireless communication
switches or devices. While in Standby Mode (Sleep Mode),
the computer operating system may reactivate itself to run
preprogrammed tasks or to preserve unsaved data, and
might interfere with aviation or other systems, possibly
causing serious injury.
(f) Beep Volume
This option selects the volume of beep (Warning). “OFF”, “Low”, “Medium”
(Default) or “High” can be selected. If a memory module that does not comply
with the standards, the computer beeps at maximum volume.
(f) Diagnostic Mode
This option sets whether the BIOS Setup Diagnostic test is enabled.
Disabled
Enabled
The Diagnostic test is disabled. (Default)
The Diagnostic test is enabled.
3-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
8. Configuration
This option displays the configuration method.
(a) Device Config.
The devices are initialized when the PNP OS loads.
Setup by OS
Initializes devices, which is needed to load an operating
system. Operating system initializes other devices.
(Default)
All Devices
All devices will be initialized.
If you are using an OS that does not have PNP capacity, select “All Devices.”
The Display shows the following message:
Device Config. = All Devices
9. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery
save mode.
Full Power
The following shows full power settings.
Low Power
The following shows low power settings.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
NOTE: The brightness is when a AC adaptor is connected. When powered by a battery
it is displayed as follows.
Battery Save Mode = Full power : LCD Bright ness = Bright.
Battery Save Mode = Low power: LCD Bright ness = Semi-Bright.
(a) Battery Save Mode
When “User Setting” is selected, the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE
OPTION is displayed. The following set of options can be selected in the
submenu.
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High
Low
CPU operates at high speed. (Default)
CPU operates at low speed.
CPU Sleep Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables sleep mode. (Default)
Disables sleep mode.
LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright
Bright
Full brightness for maximum visibility.
Full brightness for high visibility. (Default)
Less than full brightness for saving power.
Semi-Bright
Cooling Method
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on or the processing speed is
lowered automatically. When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the
fan turns off.
Maximum performance
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically at a high speed to cool down the
CPU.(Default)
Performance
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically. When the CPU temperature falls
to a normal range, the fan turns off.
3-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Battery optimized
If the CPU becomes too hot, the processing
speed is lowered. If the temperature is still too
high, the fan turns on. When the CPU
temperature falls to a normal range, the fan is
turned off and the processing speed is increased.
Cooling optimized
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on.
automatically in a high speed to cool down the
CPU. Gives priority to the decrease of
temperature at the bottom of the PC.
(b) PCI Express Link ASPM
Enabled
Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used. (Default)
Auto
Saves power consumption, when the PCI Express device is not
used while the battery is working.
Disabled
Disables the power saving function and gives priority to the
performance.
(c) Enhanced C-States
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.
Enabled
Disabled
This lowers the power consumption.
This does not lower the power consumption
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
10. .I/O ports
This option controls settings for the parallel port.
NOTE: Do not assign the same interrupt request level and I/O address to the serial port
and PC card.
(a) Serial
Use this option to set the COM level for the serial port. The serial port
interrupt request level (IRQ) and I/O port base address for each COM level is
shown below:
COM level
COM1
Interrupt level
I/O address
3F8H
4
(Serial port default)
COM2
3
2F8H
COM3
4
3E8H
COM3
5
3E8H
COM3
7
3E8H
COM4
3
2E8H
COM4
5
2E8H
COM4
7
2E8H
Not Used
Disables port
11. Drives I/O
This option displays the address and interrupt level for hard disk drive, optical drive
and PC card. It is for information only and cannot be changed.
(a) Built-in HDD
This item displays the Serial ATA Port Number. It is for information only and
cannot be changed.
Serial ATA Port0
(b) CD-ROM
This option displays the setting of the address and interrupt level of the
installed drive. This cannot be changed. Even if an installed drive is not CD-
ROM drive, “CD-ROM” is displayed.
3-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(c) SATA Controller Mode
This feature sets the SATA Controller Mode.
AHCI
Compatibility
Sets AHCI which is the mode for VistaTM (default)
Sets the mode for legacy OS. Use this mode when the
driver corresponding to AHCI is not used.
12. PCI Bus
This item displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus. It is for information only and
cannot be changed.
PCI BUS = IRQ10, IRQ11
13. Display
This group of options configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected
Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise it selects the internal LCD. (Default)
LCD+AnalogRGB Selects both the internal LCD and the external monitor
for simultaneous display.
NOTE: Pressing Fn+F5 changes the display setting in the order of internal LCD to
simultaneous to external monitor.
14. Peripheral
Use this option to select the parallel port mode and hard disk mode.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
This option enables and disables the Dual Point.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the Dual Point. (Default)
Disables the Dual Point.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
15. Legacy Emulation.
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation. If
your operating system does not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse
and keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation item to
Enabled.
Enabled
Disabled
USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)
USB Legacy Support cannot be used.
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Use this option to enable or disable USB-FDD Legacy Emulation.
Enabled
Disabled
USB Legacy Support can be used. (Default)
USB Legacy Support cannot be used.
(c) USB Memory BIOS Support Type
Sets the type of the USB memory as a startup device.
HDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the HDD
(Default).
Based on the [HDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.
The order with respect to the other HDD can be set in the
[HDD Priority Options] item.
FDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent to the FDD.
Based on the [FDD] order in the [Boot Priority Options] item.
16. PCI LAN
This option enables/disables the Built-in LAN functions.
(a) Built-in LAN
Enabled
Disabled
Enables Built-in LAN functions. (Default)
Disables Built-in LAN functions.
3-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
17. Security controller
(a) TPM
Disables the security controller called TPM (Trusted Platform Module).
When the cursor is on the Enable (Disable) and the Space is pressed,
message is displayed and the PC waits Y or N key input by the user.
When Y is pressed, it is sets to Enable (Disable). After changing, the cursor
could not be moved on the TPM tem. This option can be changed after
rebooting.
Disabled
Enabled
Disables the TPM. (Default)
Enables the TPM.
(b) Clear TPM Owner
This is not displayed when the TPM is set to Disabled. This is executed,
when the PC is disposed or the owner of the PC changes.
When the cursor is on this item and the Space is pressed, message is
displayed and the PC waits Y, E, S and Enter key inputs by the user.
When Y, E, S and Enter keys are pressed, the data is disposed.
After changing, the display of TPM item is changed to Disabled and this item
becomes not displayed and the cursor could not be moved on the TPM item.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 BIOS SETUP
3-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-ii [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Chapter 4
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Battery pack ............................................................................................................... 4-8
PC card..................................................................................................................... 4-10
Bridge media............................................................................................................ 4-11
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-12
MDC/Memory module............................................................................................. 4-16
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-19
Bluetooth module..................................................................................................... 4-23
SW membrane.......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.10 Fan hood................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.11 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-29
4.12 Optical drive ............................................................................................................ 4-33
4.13 Cover assembly and base assembly......................................................................... 4-36
4.14 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-39
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board .......................................................................................... 4-42
4.16 RTC battery.............................................................................................................. 4-45
4.17 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-47
4.18 RGB board ............................................................................................................... 4-48
4.19 System board............................................................................................................ 4-51
4.20 Battery lock/Battery latch........................................................................................ 4-58
4.21 HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable.................................................................. 4-60
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU................................... 4-62
4.23 PC card slot.............................................................................................................. 4-70
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-71
4.25 Cover latch............................................................................................................... 4-75
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna .............................................................. 4-76
4.27 LCD cable................................................................................................................ 4-87
4.28 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-89
4.29 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-92
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp..................................................................................................... 4-95
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.30.1 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp........... 4-96
4.30.2 Replacing the 15.4-inch WSXGA+ Samsung Fluorescent Lamp.... 4-100
Figures
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Removing the battery pack ............................................................................ 4-8
Removing the PC card ................................................................................ 4-10
Removing the Bridge media ....................................................................... 4-11
Removing the HDD cover ........................................................................... 4-12
Removing the HDD assembly ..................................................................... 4-13
Separating the HDD and HDD holder ......................................................... 4-14
Removing the memory module.................................................................... 4-16
Removing the MDC..................................................................................... 4-17
Removing the keyboard holder.................................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-10 Removing the keyboard (1) ......................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-11 Removing the keyboard (2) ......................................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-12 Removing the Bluetooth module ................................................................. 4-23
Figure 4-13 Removing the switch cover.......................................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-14 Removing the SW membrane ...................................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-15 Removing the fan hood................................................................................ 4-27
Figure 4-16 Removing the wireless LAN card................................................................ 4-30
Figure 4-17 Removing the insulator................................................................................ 4-31
Figure 4-18 Removing the antennas................................................................................ 4-31
Figure 4-19 Removing the optical drive.......................................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-20 Disassembling the optical drive................................................................... 4-34
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly and base assembly (1)................................. 4-36
Figure 4-22 Removing the cover assembly and base assembly (2)................................. 4-37
Figure 4-23 Removing the touch pad (1)......................................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-24 Removing the touch pad (2)......................................................................... 4-40
Figure 4-25 Removing the fingerprint sensor board hold plate....................................... 4-42
Figure 4-26 Removing the fingerprint sensor board ....................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-27 Removing the RTC battery.......................................................................... 4-46
4-iv [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Figure 4-28 Removing the microphone........................................................................... 4-47
Figure 4-29 Removing the RGB board (1)...................................................................... 4-48
Figure 4-30 Removing the RGB board (2)...................................................................... 4-49
Figure 4-31 Removing the cable holder .......................................................................... 4-51
Figure 4-32 Removing the system board......................................................................... 4-52
Figure 4-33 Removing the modem jack/USB board ....................................................... 4-54
Figure 4-34 Removing the battery lock/battery latch...................................................... 4-58
Figure 4-35 Removing the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable.............................. 4-60
Figure 4-36 Removing the North bridge and GPU hold plate......................................... 4-62
Figure 4-37 Removing the North bridge hold plate ........................................................ 4-63
Figure 4-38 Removing the CPU heat sink (with a fan) ................................................... 4-64
Figure 4-39 Removing the fan......................................................................................... 4-65
Figure 4-40 Removing the CPU ...................................................................................... 4-66
Figure 4-41 Installing the CPU........................................................................................ 4-67
Figure 4-42 Applying new grease ................................................................................... 4-68
Figure 4-43 Removing the PC card slot .......................................................................... 4-70
Figure 4-44 Removing the display rear cover ................................................................. 4-71
Figure 4-45 Removing the FL inverter............................................................................ 4-72
Figure 4-46 Removing the LCD unit............................................................................... 4-73
Figure 4-47 Removing the cover latch ............................................................................ 4-75
Figure 4-48 Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna............................ 4-76
Figure 4-49 Removing the LCD cable............................................................................. 4-87
Figure 4-50 Removing the LCD mask............................................................................. 4-89
Figure 4-51 Removing the hinge..................................................................................... 4-90
Figure 4-52 Removing the speaker (1)............................................................................ 4-92
Figure 4-53 Removing the speaker (2)............................................................................ 4-93
Figure 4-54 Removing the speaker (3)............................................................................ 4-93
Figure 4-55 Installing the speaker ................................................................................... 4-94
Figure 4-56 to 4-59 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1) to (4).....4-96 to 4-98
Figure 4-60 to 4-63 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WSXGA+) (1) to (4)
........................................................................................... 4-100 to 4-102
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-vi [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 Overview
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the procedure for removing and replacing the field replaceable units
(FRUs) in the PC. It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one.
The chart below provides a guide as to which other FRUs must be removed before a
particular FRU can be removed. The numbers in the chart indicate the relevant section
numbers in this manual.
In all cases when removing an FRU, the battery pack must also be removed. When repairing
an FRU that is the potential cause of a computer fault, use the chart to determine the order in
which FRUs need to be removed.
Chart Notation
The chart shows the case
for the following example:
• Removing the SW
membrane
All FRUs down to the “4.2
Battery pack” to “4.8
Bluetooth module” above
the 4.9 SW membrane must
be removed.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview
Safety Precautions
Please read the following safety instructions before disassembling the computer and always
follow the instructions while working on the computer.
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or
explode.
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that
could cause the battery pack to explode.
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high
voltages. If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled
computer to check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors
or components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level
maintenance.
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power
source, to avoid exposure to electric shock.
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric
shock. Never work with wet or damp hands.
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any
risk of damage to the computer.
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the
unit. Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed.
Make sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause
short circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to
the component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of
accidental electric shock.
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.
4-2 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 Overview
4 Replacement Procedures
Before You Begin
Take note of the following points before starting work. Always remove the AC adapter and
battery pack before commencing any of the procedures. The procedure for removing the
battery pack is described in section “4.2. Battery Pack”.
Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
Use the designated tools.
Ensure that the environment for working on and storing parts does not contain any of the
following.
•
•
•
Dust or dirt
Static electricity
Extremely hot, cold, or humid conditions
Perform the diagnostic tests described in Chapter 2 to determine which FRU is the cause of
the fault.
Do not perform any unnecessary work. Always work in accordance with the disassembly and
re-assembly procedures in this manual.
Keep parts removed from the computer in a safe place away from the computer where they
will not be damaged or interfere with your work.
Disassembling requires the removal of a large number of screws. Keep removed screws in a
safe place such that you can determine which screws belong to which part.
When re-assembling, ensure that you use the correct screws and fit parts in the correct
position. Screw sizes are noted in the text and figures.
As all parts have sharp edges and corners, take care not to cut yourself.
After replacing an FRU, check that the computer and replaced part operate correctly.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview
Disassembly Procedure
Four main types of cable connector are used.
•
•
•
•
Pressure plate connector
Spring connector
Back flip connector
Normal pin connector
For pressure plate connectors, slide the pressure plate holding tags on both sides of the
plastic pressure plate on the connector and pull the cable out from the connector. When
reconnecting the cable to the pressure plate connector, slide the pressure plate holding tags
on both sides of the plastic pressure plate on the connector and insert the cable into the
connector. Push both tags of the pressure plate such that the cable is fixed in the correct
position. Pull the cable to ensure that it is securely connected.
For spring connectors, lift up the stopper frees the cable and allow it to be pulled out. To
reconnect, hold the stopper in the up position and insert the cable, then lower the stopper to
secure the cable. Pull the cable to ensure that it is securely connected.
For back flip connectors, lift up the flip plate frees the cable and allow it to be pulled out. To
reconnect, hold the flip plate in the up position and insert the cable, then lower the flip plate
to secure the cable. Pull the cable to ensure that it is securely connected.
Normal pin connectors are used for all other cables. Simply pull out or push in these
connectors to disconnect or reconnect.
Back flip connector
Pressure plate connector
Spring connector
4-4 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 Overview
4 Replacement Procedures
Assembly Procedures
After the computer has been disassembled and the part that caused the fault has been repaired
or replaced, the computer must be reassembled.
Take note of the following general points when assembling the computer.
•
Take your time and follow the instructions carefully. Hurrying the assembly work
will only introduce new problems.
•
•
Check that all cables and connectors are securely connected.
Before fastening FRUs or other parts in place, ensure that no cables are caught on
screws or the FRU.
•
•
Check that all latches are securely closed.
Ensure that you have installed all FRUs correctly and do not have any screws left
over. Using an incorrect screw may damage the thread or screw head and result in the
FRU not being securely fastened in place.
After installing FRUs, check that the computer operates correctly.
Tools and Equipment
For your safety and the safety of the people around you, it is important that you use
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment. Correctly utilizing of the equipment increases the
percentage of successful repairs and saves on the cost of damaged or destroyed parts. The
following equipment is required for disassembly and assembly.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
One Philips screwdriver with type 0 bit (for S-THIN HEAD screws)
One Philips screwdriver with type 1 bit (for screws other than above)
One flat-blade screwdriver
Tweezers (for lifting screws)
ESD mats (lay on work table or floor)
An ESD wrist strap and heel grounder
Anti-static carpet or flooring
A pair of needle-nose pliers
Air-ionizers in highly static sensitive areas
Antenna coaxial cable disconnector
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 Overview
Screw Tightening Torque
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws; undertightening can
result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or components come
loose.
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screw driver for quick and easy
operations.
• M2
• M2.5
• M3
0.167 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)
0.294 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)
0.549 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)
NOTE: To prevent damage to THIN HEAD screws, use type 0 bit philips screwdriver.
Use, however, the PH point size “1” screwdriver for screws fixing the memory
slot cover and keyboard. Press along the axis of the screwdriver while turning
the screw. This is because the contact area between the screw and driver is less
than for a pan head screw (standard pan-shaped screw head).
4-6 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 Overview
4 Replacement Procedures
Grip Color
Some screws have a colored grip area to help you determine the length of the screw.
‰ Even numbered length screws: Brown
‰ Odd numbered length screws: White
‰ Special length screw: Blue
“Special length screw” means screws whose length is indicated in an integral number to the
first decimal places such as 2.5 mm, 2.6 mm and so on.
Grip area
Screw Notation
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Format:
Screw type + Screw length (mm)
Screw type
B: Bind screw
F: Flat head screw
S: Super thin head screw
T: Tapping screw
U: Other screws (Unique screws: pan head, stud, etc.)
Example: B6 ... 6mm BIND screw
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.2 Battery pack
4.2 Battery pack
Removing the Battery pack
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: Take care not to short circuit the terminals when removing the battery pack.
Similarly, do not drop, knock, scratch, disassemble, twist, or bend the
battery pack.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer face down.
4. Release the battery lock.
5. Remove the battery pack while sliding the battery release latch as shown in the
following figure.
NOTE: For environmental reasons, do not throw away a spent battery pack.
Battery release latch
Battery pack
Battery lock
Figure 4-1 Removing the battery pack
4-8 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Battery pack
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Battery pack
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-1.
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect
the spent battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba for
replacements.
NOTE: Check the battery’s terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a
dry cloth.
1. Turn off the power of the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adapter and all other external devices to the computer.
3. Insert the battery pack into the battery slot. Make sure the battery pack is installed
securely.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3 PC card
4.3 PC card
Removing the PC card
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
CAUTION: Before you remove the PC card, refer to the card’s documentation and to
your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Press the eject button for the PC card to extend the button.
2. Press the extended eject button to pop the PC card out.
3. Grasp the PC card and pull it out.
Eject button
PC card
Figure 4-2 Removing the PC card
Installing the PC card
To install the PC card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-2.
1. Insert the PC card into the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.
4-10 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Bridge media
4 Replacement Procedures
4.4 Bridge media
Removing the Bridge media
To remove the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
CAUTION: Before you remove the Bridge media, refer to the media’s documentation
and to your operating system documentation for proper procedures and
precautions.
1. Push the Bridge media. It will pop out partly, so pull out the card. (For an instance,
SD card is described in the figure 4-3.).
Bridge media (SD card)
Figure 4-3 Removing the Bridge media
Installing the Bridge media
To install the Bridge media, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-3.
1. Insert the Bridge media into the card slot.
2. Push it carefully to ensure a firm connection.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.5 HDD
4.5 HDD
CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the top and bottom surface as shown by
the arrow. Hold it by the sides.
Removing the HDD
To remove the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 to 4-6.
1. Turn the computer upside down.
2. Remove the following screws securing the HDD cover.
3. Insert your finger into the slot and lift the HDD cover to remove.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
HDD cover
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Slot
Figure 4-4 Removing the HDD cover
4-12 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 HDD
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Remove the HDD assembly from the connector of the HDD cable. Be careful not to
damage the connector.
HDD assembly
HDD cable
Figure 4-5 Removing the HDD assembly
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.5 HDD
NOTE: The following steps describe how to disassemble the HDD assembly, however, do
not disassemble if the HDD is working properly.
5. Place the HDD assembly on a flat surface, and remove the following screws.
•
M3×4C FLAT HEAD screw
×4
6. Separate the HDD and HDD Holder.
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the center of the HDD assembly. It may damage
the HDD assembly. Hold the HDD assembly by its corners.
M3×4C FLAT HEAD
HDD Holder
HDD
M3×4C FLAT HEAD
Figure 4-6 Separating the HDD and HDD holder
4-14 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 HDD
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the HDD
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-4 to 4-6.
CAUTION: Do not hold the HDD by its top and bottom flat surfaces. It may damage the
HDD.
1. Install the HDD to the HDD Holder and secure them with the following screws.
•
M3×4C
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to the center of the HDD assembly. It may damage
the HDD assembly. Hold the HDD assembly by its corners.
2. Set the connector of the HDD cable upward and connect the HDD assembly to the
connector of the HDD cable. Lay the HDD assembly down into the slot.
3. Install the HDD cover and secure it with the following screws.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 MDC/Memory module
4.6 MDC/Memory module
Removing the MDC/Memory module
To remove the MDC/memory module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-7 and 4-8.
1. Loosen the screw and remove the memory module cover.
2. Open the left and right latches outside and remove the memory module(s).
CAUTION: When removing the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot
mode and powered off.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
Screw
Memory module cover
Memory module B
Latch
Latch
Memory module A
(Under the memory module B)
Figure 4-7 Removing the memory module
4-16 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 MDC/Memory module
4 Replacement Procedures
3. Remove the following screws securing the MDC.
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×2
4. Lift the MDC straight above and remove it from the CN3010 on the system board.
5. Disconnect the MDC cable from the connector on the MDC.
M2×4B BIND
MDC cable
MDC
CN3010
Figure 4-8 Removing the MDC
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 MDC/Memory module
Installing the MDC/Memory module
To install the MDC/memory module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-7 and 4-8.
NOTE: When the power of the computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically
the memory size. Confirm that the new memory is detected correctly.
If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.
1. Connect the MDC cable to the connector on the MDC.
2. Connect the MDC to the connector CN3010 on the system board by pressing it
carefully. Be careful not to damage the MDC and connector.
3. Secure the MDC with the following screws.
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×2
CAUTION: When installing the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot
mode and powered off. Inserting a memory module with the power on might
damage the module or the computer itself.
When installing only one memory module, be sure to insert it into the slot A.
Otherwise, the computer or the memory may not work properly.
Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the computer.
Dust and stains on the connectors may cause memory access problems.
4. Insert the memory module(s) into the connector(s) slantwise and press it to connect
firmly.
NOTE: When replacing the memory module A, do it after removing the memory module
B.
5. Press down the memory module until it is latched firmly.
6. Install the memory module cover and secure it with the screw.
4-18 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Keyboard
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Keyboard
Removing the Keyboard
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-9 to 4-11.
1. Turn over the computer.
2. Open the display and make it flat.
3. Insert your fingers into the slots on both sides and remove the keyboard holder.
Display
Slot
Slot
Keyboard holder
Figure 4-9 Removing the keyboard holder
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Keyboard
4. Remove the following screws securing the keyboard.
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
5. Lift the top edge of the keyboard while releasing the hook and turn the keyboard
face down on the palm rest.
Hook
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Keyboard
Figure 4-10 Removing the keyboard (1)
4-20 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Keyboard
4 Replacement Procedures
6. Remove the following screw and keyboard support plate.
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD screw ×1
•
7. Disconnect the keyboard cable from the connector CN3230 on the system board and
remove the keyboard.
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Keyboard support plate
Keyboard
Keyboard cable
CN3230
Figure 4-11 Removing the keyboard (2)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Keyboard
Installing the Keyboard
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-9 to 4-11.
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest.
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the connector CN3230 on the system board.
CAUTION: Extra portion of the keyboard cable must be put under the palm rest.
3. Install the keyboard support plate and secure it with the following screw.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
4. Turn the keyboard face up and set it in place.
5. Secure the keyboard with the following screws.
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
6. Install the keyboard holder and press to secure the latches.
4-22 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8 Bluetooth module
4 Replacement Procedures
4.8 Bluetooth module
Removing the Bluetooth module
To remove the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-12.
1. Disconnect the Bluetooth antenna cable from the Bluetooth module using an
antenna coaxial cable disconnector.
2. Push the hook in the direction in the following figure and remove the Bluetooth
module from the slot.
3. Disconnect the Bluetooth cable from the connector on the Bluetooth module.
4. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
disconnect the Bluetooth cable from the connector CN4400 on the system board.
Bluetooth antenna cable
Bluetooth module
Hook
Insulator
Bluetooth cable
CN4400
Figure4-12 Removing the Bluetooth module
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.8 Bluetooth module
Installing the Bluetooth module
To install the Bluetooth module, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-12.
1. Connect the Bluetooth cable to the connector CN4400 on the system board.
2. Stick a new insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
NOTE: Do not reuse the removed insulator.
3. Connect the Bluetooth cable to the connector on the Bluetooth module.
4. Install the Bluetooth module to the slot until the hook latches.
5. Connect the Bluetooth antenna cable to the connector on the Bluetooth module.
4-24 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 SW membrane
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 SW membrane
Removing the SW membrane
To remove the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-13 and 4-14.
1. Lift the switch cover up while pushing the portion shown in the figure below.
Switch cover
Figure 4-13 Removing the switch cover
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 SW membrane
2. Disconnect the SW membrane cable from the connector CN9550 on the system
board.
3. Push down the hook and slide the SW membrane in the direction in the figure below.
4. Remove the SW membrane.
SW membrane cable
CN9550
SW membrane
Hook
Figure 4-14 Removing the SW membrane
Installing the SW membrane
To install the SW membrane, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-13 and 4-14.
1. Install the SW membrane to the slot while sliding it in the opposite direction in
removing.
2. Connect the SW membrane cable to the connector CN9550 on the system board.
3. Install the switch cover while engaging latches.
4-26 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Fan hood
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Fan hood
NOTE: When repairing the PC, clean the fan hood and cooling fin with a vacuum
cleaner and cotton sticks, and remove dusts with tweezers.
Removing the Fan hood
To remove the fan hood, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer and
remove the fan hood from the slot.
Insulator
Fan hood
Figure4-15 Removing the fan hood
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Fan hood
Installing the Fan hood
To install the fan hood, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-15.
1. Install the fan hood into the slot.
2. Stick a new insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
NOTE: Do not reuse the removed insulator.
4-28 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.11 Wireless LAN card
4 Replacement Procedures
4.11 Wireless LAN card
Removing the Wireless LAN card
To remove the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16 to 4-18.
CAUTION: Do not try to remove the wireless LAN card with the computer turned on. It
may cause damages to the computer or the wireless LAN card. Do not touch
the connectors on the wireless LAN card on the computer. Debris on the
connectors may cause the wireless LAN card access problems.
1. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
2. Disconnect the wireless LAN antenna cables from the wireless LAN card using an
antenna coaxial cable disconnector.
NOTE: There are two types of wireless LAN card. One type has two antenna connectors
to which white and black antenna cables are connected and the other type has
three connectors to which white, black and gray antenna cables are connected.
3. Remove the following screws securing the wireless LAN card.
•
M2×4B BIND screw
×2
4. Disconnect the wireless LAN card from the connector on the system board.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.11 Wireless LAN card
Insulator
M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN card
Wireless LAN antenna cable
(white, black and gray)
(Three antenna cables)
Insulator
M2x4B BIND
Wireless LAN card
Wireless LAN antenna cable
(white and black)
(Two antenna cables)
Figure 4-16 Removing the wireless LAN card
4-30 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.11 Wireless LAN card
4 Replacement Procedures
5. Peel off the insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
Insulator
Figure 4-17 Removing the insulator
6. Pull out the wireless LAN antenna cables from the hole of the cover assembly.
7. Pass the Bluetooth antenna cable and wireless LAN antenna cables from the hole
of the cover assembly.
Hole
Wireless LAN antenna cable
Bluetooth antenna cable
Hole
Figure 4-18 Removing the antennas
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.11 Wireless LAN card
Installing the Wireless LAN card
To install the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-16 to 4-18.
CAUTION: Be sure to switch the computer off before installing the wireless LAN card.
Otherwise, the computer or the wireless LAN card may be damaged.
1. Pass the Bluetooth antenna cable through the hole of the cover assembly and
arrange it into the slot of the cover assembly in place.
2. Pass the wireless LAN antenna cables through the holes of the cover assembly and
arrange them in place.
3. Stick a new insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer in place.
NOTE: Do not reuse the removed insulator.
4. Insert the wireless LAN card to the connector on the system board slantwise and
press it to connect firmly.
5. Connect the wireless LAN antenna cables to the connectors on the wireless LAN
card.
NOTE: In the wireless LAN card that has three connectors, connect the white cable to 1,
black to 2 and gray to 3 marked on the wireless LAN card.
6. Secure the wireless LAN card with the following screws.
•
M2×4B BIND
×2
7. Stick a new insulator that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
NOTE: Do not reuse the removed insulator.
4-32 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12 Optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures
4.12 Optical drive
Removing the Optical drive
To remove the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19 and 4-20.
CAUTION: After removing the optical drive, do not put fingers inside the slot. It may
cause injury.
1. Close the display and turn over the computer.
2. Remove the following screw securing the optical drive.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
3. Turn over the computer and open the display.
4. Remove the optical drive from the connector on the system board while pushing it in
the direction in the figure below.
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Optical drive
(Push it on the front of
the cover assembly)
Optical drive
(In the slot)
Figure 4-19 Removing the optical drive
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.12 Optical drive
5. Remove the following screws and pushing plate.
•
M2×2.7C
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
6. Remove the following screw and mounting plate.
•
M2×3C
S-THIN HEAD screw
×1
Mounting plate
Pushing plate
M2×3C S-THIN HEAD
M2×2.7C S-THIN HEAD
Figure 4-20 Disassembling the optical drive
4-34 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12 Optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Optical drive
To install the optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-19 and 4-20.
1. Set the mounting plate and secure it with the following screw.
•
M2×3C
S-THIN HEAD screw
×1
2. Set the pushing plate and secure it with the following screws.
•
M2×2.7C
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
3. Insert the optical drive into the slot and push it until it is firmly connected to the
connector on the system board.
4. Turn over the computer and secure the optical drive with the following screw.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.13 Cover assembly and Base assembly
4
Replacement Procedures
4.13 Cover assembly and Base assembly
Removing the Cover assembly and Base assembly
To remove the cover assembly and base assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure
4-21 and 4-22.
1. Close the display and turn over the computer.
2. Remove the following screws.
•
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
FLAT HEAD screw
×8 (“6” in the figure below)
M2.5×16B
×5 (“16” in the figure below)
3. Disconnect the USB cable from the connector CN4612 on the system board.
“6”
“16”
“6”
“16”
“16”
“6”
“6”
“6”
“6”
“16”
“16”
“6”
“6”
USB cable
(Connected to CN4612)
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly and base assembly (1)
4-36 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.13 Cover assembly and Base assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Turn over the computer and open the display.
5. Disconnect the LCD cable, speaker cable, fingerprint sensor cable and touch pad
cable from the connector CN5000, CN6170, CN 9550 and CN3240 on the system
board.
6. Remove the following screws.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×3
7. Separate the cover assembly and base assembly while releasing the latches.
Speaker cable
(Connected to CN6170)
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
Touch pad cable
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
(Connected to CN3240)
Fingerprint sensor cable
(Connected to CN9550)
Cover assembly
Base assembly
LCD cable
(Connected to CN5000)
Figure 4-22 Removing the cover assembly and base assembly (2)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.13 Cover assembly and Base assembly
Installing the Cover assembly and Base assembly
To install the cover assembly and base assembly, follow the steps below and refer to Figure
4-21 to 4-22.
1. Place the cover assembly on the base assembly and engage the latches.
2. Connect the LCD cable, speaker cable, fingerprint sensor cable and touch pad
cable to the connector CN5000, CN6170, CN 9550 and CN3240 on the system board.
3. Secure the cover assembly with the following screws.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×3
4. Close the display and turn over the computer.
5. Connect the USB cable to the connector CN4612 on the system board.
6. Secure the cover assembly with the following screws.
•
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
FLAT HEAD screw
×8 (“6” in the figure 4-21)
M2.5×16B
×5 (“16” in the figure 4-21)
4-38 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.14 Touch pad
4 Replacement Procedures
4.14 Touch pad
Removing the Touch pad
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23 and 4-24.
1. Lift the tip portions up first and remove the touch pad cover while releasing latches.
2. Remove the following screw and touch pad assembly from the slot.
•
M2.5×10B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
Touch pad cover
M2.5×10B FLAT HEAD
Tip portion
Touch pad assembly
Figure 4-23 Removing the touch pad (1)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.14 Touch pad
3. Turn over the touch pad assembly and peel off the glass tape and disconnect the
touch pad cable from the connector on the touch pad assembly.
Glass tape
Touch pad cable
Touch pad
assembly
Connector
Figure 4-24 Removing the touch pad (2)
4-40 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.14 Touch pad
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Touch pad
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-23 and 4-24.
1. Connect the touch pad cable to the connector on the touch pad and stick the glass
tape in place.
2. Turn over the touch pad assembly and seat it to the slot.
3. Secure the touch pad assembly with the following screw.
•
M2.5×10B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
4. Install the touch pad cover while engaging latches.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board
Removing the Fingerprint sensor board
To remove the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-25 and
4-26.
1. Push the hook down and remove the fingerprint sensor board hold plate while
sliding it from the guides in the direction of the arrow in the figure below.
2. Peel off the glass tape.
Glass tape
Hook
Guide
Fingerprint sensor board hold plate
Figure 4-25 Removing the fingerprint sensor board hold plate
4-42 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board
4 Replacement Procedures
3. Remove the fingerprint sensor board fixed with the double-sided tape and peel off
the double-sided tape that prevents a waterdrop from entering the computer.
4. Disconnect the fingerprint sensor cable from the connector on the fingerprint
sensor board.
Connector
Fingerprint sensor cable
Guide
Fingerprint sensor board
Double-sided tape
Figure 4-26 Removing the fingerprint sensor board
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.15 Fingerprint sensor board
Installing the Fingerprint sensor board
To install the fingerprint sensor board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-25 and 4-
26.
NOTE: When installing a new fingerprint sensor board, make sure that the insulators
and gasket are placed as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the fingerprint sensor cable to the connector on the fingerprint sensor
board.
2. Stick a new double-sided tape in place and install the fingerprint sensor board
while inserting it into the guides.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the removed double-sided tape.
3. Install the fingerprint sensor board hold plate while sliding it into the guides.
4. Arrange the fingerprint sensor cable and stick the glass tape in place.
4-44 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.16 RTC battery
4 Replacement Procedures
4.16 RTC battery
WARNING: When replacing the RTC battery, be sure to use a genuine battery
authorized by Toshiba. Installing the wrong battery could cause a battery
explosion or other damage.
If the RTC battery is found abnormal, it must not be installed. Replace it
with a new battery, and dispose of the old one according to the local
regulations.
Check for any of the following signs of damage:
1) Electrolyte leakage
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Corrosion (greenish color) on the battery connector or cable
Corrosion on the computer’s battery connector
White powder on any part of the battery
White powder in the battery tray
Clear liquid on the battery
Clear liquid in the battery tray
Clear liquid on any board near the battery
2) Damage to the connection cable
3) Damage to the connector housing
If any powder or liquid is found in or around the battery tray, clean it. Be
careful not to let any leaked material contact your eyes or mouth. Do not
inhale fumes from leaked material.
If leaked material contacts your skin, eyes or mouth, wash the affected area
thoroughly with clean water.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.16 RTC battery
Removing the RTC battery
To remove the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-27.
1. Peel off the glass tape.
2. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector CN9300 on the system board
and remove the RTC battery.
Glass tape
RTC battery cable
RTC battery
CN9300
Figure 4-27 Removing the RTC battery
Installing the RTC battery
To install the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-27.
1. Connect the RTC battery cable to the connector CN9300 on the system board.
2. Seat the RTC battery in place while arranging the RTC battery cable in the guide
and stick the glass tape on it.
4-46 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.17 Microphone
4 Replacement Procedures
4.17 Microphone
Removing the Microphone
To remove the microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-28.
1. Peel off the glass tape.
2. Disconnect the microphone cable from the connector CN6050 on the system board
and remove the microphone from the slot of the base assembly.
Glass tape
Microphone cable
Microphone
CN6050
Figure 4-28 Removing the microphone
Installing the Microphone
To install the microphone, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-28.
1. Connect the microphone cable to the connector CN6050 on the system board.
2. Install the microphone into the slot of the base assembly and secure it with the glass
tape.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.18 RGB board
4.18 RGB board
Removing the RGB board
To remove the RGB board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-29 and 4-30.
1. Peel the insulator and take out the LAN jack from the slot. (Be careful, because the
LAN jack cable is still connected to the connector on the back of the system board.)
LAN jack cable
LAN jack
Insulator
Figure 4-29 Removing the RGB board (1)
4-48 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.18 RGB board
4 Replacement Procedures
2. Remove the cushion from the slot.
3. Disconnect the RGB board cable from the connector on the RGB board. (Be careful,
because the RGB board cable is still connected to the connector on the back of the
system board.)
4. Remove the RGB board while pushing the base assembly in the direction of the
arrow in the figure below.
RGB board
Cushion
RGB board cable
Figure 4-30 Removing the RGB board (2)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.18 RGB board
Installing the RGB board
To install the RGB board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-29 and 4-30.
NOTE: When installing a new RGB board, make sure that the insulator and gaskets are
placed as shown in the following figure.
1. Connect the RGB board cable to the connector on the RGB board.
2. Install the RGB board to the slot of the base assembly while insert the RGB
connecter into the hole of the base assembly.
3. Install the cushion into the slot.
4. Open the insulator on the cushion and arrange the LAN jack cable on the insulator.
5. Install the LAN jack into the slot.
6. Stick the insulator over the LAN jack cable, referring to the figure 4-29.
4-50 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board
Removing the System board
To remove the system board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-33.
1. Remove the cable holder while pushing four hooks up.
Cable holder
Hook
Hook
Figure 4-31 Removing the cable holder
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board
2. Disconnect the DC-IN jack from the connector CN8800 on the system board.
3. Peel off the glass tape and take out the HDD cable from the slot. (Be careful,
because the HDD cable is still connected to the connector on the back of the system
board.)
4. Remove the system board while releasing two latches.
DC-IN jack
DC-IN jack cable
Glass tape
CN8800
HDD cable
Latch
Latch
System board
Wireless communication switch
Figure 4-32 Removing the system board
4-52 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: When removing/installing the system board, handle the “Can be handled”
areas and do not handle the “Can not be handled” area as shown in the
figure below.
Can be handled
Can not be handled
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board
5. Peel the insulator and remove the modem jack and USB board from the slots.
Modem jack
USB board
USB board cable
Modem jack
cable
Insulator
Figure 4-33 Removing the modem jack/USB board
4-54 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the System board
To install the system board, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-31 to 4-33.
NOTE: When installing a new system board (front), make sure that the insulators, screws
and CPU back plate assemblies are placed as shown in the following figure.
(Front of the system board)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 System board
NOTE: When installing a new system board (back), make sure that the insulators, gasket,
screws and studs are placed as shown in the following figure.
(Back of the system board)
4-56 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 System board
4 Replacement Procedures
1. Install the modem jack and USB board into the slot.
2. Arrange the modem jack cable and USB board cable to the guides and stick the
insulator in place.
3. Install the system board while engaging two latches.
CAUTION: When installing the system board, make sure that the wireless
communication switch is engaged to the guide.
4. Install the DC-IN jack into the slot.
5. Install the HDD cable into the slot and stick the glass tape in place.
6. Connect the DC-IN jack cable to the connector CN8800 on the system board.
CAUTION: Arrange the DC-IN jack cable, modem jack cable and USB board cable as
shown in the figure below.
Modem jack cable
DC-IN jack cable
USB board cable
7. Install the cable holder to the slot while engaging the latches.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.20 Battery lock/Battery latch
4.20 Battery lock/Battery latch
Removing the Battery lock/Battery latch
To remove the battery lock/battery latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-34.
1. Remove the battery lock cap while pushing latches inside to release them.
2. Remove the battery lock from the slot. Be careful not to lose the spring.
3. Remove the battery latch cap while pushing latches inside to release them.
4. Remove the battery latch from the slot. Be careful not to lose the spring.
Spring
Battery lock
Battery latch
Spring
Latch
Battery lock cap
Latch
Battery latch cap
Figure 4-34 Removing the battery lock/battery latch
4-58 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.20 Battery lock/Battery latch
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Battery lock/Battery latch
To install the battery lock/battery latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-34.
1. Insert the stick of battery lock into the spring.
2. Install the battery lock to the slot of the base assembly.
3. Install (push) the battery lock cap to the battery lock through the hole of the base
assembly until the latches are engaged.
4. Insert the stick of the battery latch into the spring.
5. Install the battery latch to the slot of the base assembly.
6. Install (push) the battery latch cap to the battery latch through the hole of the base
assembly until the latches are engaged.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
4.21 HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
Removing the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
To remove the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-35.
1. Turn over the system board.
2. Peel off the insulator and disconnect the HDD cable from the connector CN1900 on
the system board.
3. Disconnect the LAN jack and RGB board cable from the connector CN4100 and
CN9500 on the system board.
Insulator
CN1900
HDD cable
CN9500
RGB board cable
CN4100
LAN jack
Figure 4-35 Removing the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
4-60 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.21 HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable
To install the HDD cable/LAN jack/RGB board cable, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-35.
1. Connect the LAN jack and RGB board cable to the connector CN4100 and CN9500
on the system board.
2. Connect the HDD cable to the connector CN1900 on the system board and stick the
insulator in place.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
Removing the North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
To remove the North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/fan/CPU, follow the steps
below and refer to Figure 4-36 to 4-40.
1. Remove the following screws and remove the North bridge and GPU hold plate.
(In the case of the GPU model.)
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×4
2. Remove the North bridge and GPU heat sink.
M2×4B BIND
M2×4B BIND
North bridge and GPU hold plate
North bridge and GPU Heat sink
Figure 4-36 Removing the North bridge and GPU hold plate
4-62 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU4 Replacement Procedures
3. Remove the following screws in the reverse order of the numbers marked on the
North bridge holder and remove the North bridge hold plate. (In the case of the
Built-in GPU model.)
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×3
4. Remove the North bridge heat sink.
M2×4B BIND
M2×4B BIND
North bridge hold plate
North bridge Heat sink
Figure 4-37 Removing the North bridge hold plate
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
5. Remove the following screws in the reverse order of the numbers marked on the CPU
hold plate.
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×3
6. Remove the CPU hold plate.
7. Peel off the acetate tape and disconnect the fan cable from the connector CN8771
on the system board.
8. Remove the CPU heat sink (with a fan).
M2×4B BIND
M2×4B BIND
CPU hold plate
Fan cable
Acetate tape
CN8771
CPU heat sink
(With a fan)
Figure 4-38 Removing the CPU heat sink (with a fan)
4-64 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU4 Replacement Procedures
9. Remove the fan hood.
10. Remove the following screws and separate the CPU heat sink and fan.
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Fan hood
Fan
CPU heat sink
Figure 4-39 Removing the fan
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
11. Unlock the CPU by turning the cam counterclockwise on the CPU socket by 180
degrees with a flat-blade screwdriver.
Figure 4-40 Removing the CPU
12. Remove the CPU.
CAUTION: When removing the CPU, lift it up right above. Otherwise, pins of the CPU
may be damaged.
4-66 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
To install the North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU, follow the steps
below and refer to Figure 4-36 to 4-42.
1. Make sure that the cam of the CPU socket is in the unlock (OPEN) position.
2. Install the CPU on the CPU socket and check the CPU is installed on the correct
position.
3. Lock the CPU by rotating clockwise the cam on the CPU socket by 180 degrees with
a flat-blade driver.
Mark
Figure 4-41 Installing the CPU
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU
4. Apply new grease on the CPU and North bridge using a special syringe as shown in
the following figure. Apply quarter of scale (0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU
chip and North bridge chip. When silicon grease is already applied to the CPU, wipe
them off with a cloth in advance. (In the case of the Built-in GPU model.)
5. Apply new grease on the CPU and North bridge using a special syringe as shown in
the following figure and stick the blue sheets on the GPU. Apply quarter of scale
(0.25ml) of grease evenly on the CPU chip. When silicon grease is already applied to
the CPU, wipe them off with a cloth in advance. (In the case of the GPU model.)
Figure 4-42 Applying new grease
6. Install the fan to the CPU heat sink and secure them with the following screws.
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
7. Install the fan hood in place.
8. Install the CPU heat sink (with the fan) in place.
9. Connect the fan cable to the connector CN8771 on the system board.
10. Stick the acetate tape in place.
11. Install the CPU hold plate on the CPU heat sink and secure them with the following
screws in the order of the number marked on the CPU hold plate.
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×3
4-68 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 North bridge (and GPU) heat sink/CPU heat sink/Fan/CPU4 Replacement Procedures
12. Install the North bridge and GPU heat sink in place. (In the case of the GPU
model.)
13. Install the North bridge and GPU hold plate on the North bridge and GPU heat sink
and secure them with the following screws (Secure the circled portion first in the
figure 4-35.). (In the case of the GPU model.)
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×4
14. Install the North bridge heat sink in place. (In the case of the Built-in GPU model.)
15. Install the North bridge hold plate on the North bridge heat sink and secure them
with the following screws in the order of the number marked on the North bridge
hold plate. (In the case of the Built-in GPU model.)
•
M2×4B
BIND screw
×3
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 PC card slot
4.23 PC card slot
Removing the PC card slot
To remove the PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43.
1. Remove the following screws securing the PC card slot.
•
•
M2×3C
S-THIN HEAD screw
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
M2×8C
×2
2. Remove the PC card slot while pulling out the latch to release it.
PC card slot
Latch
M2x3C S-THIN HEAD
M2x8C S-THIN HEAD
Figure 4-43 Removing the PC card slot
Installing the PC card slot
To install the PC card slot, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43.
1. Install the PC card slot while engaging the latches and secure it with the following
screws.
• M2×3C
S-THIN HEAD screw
S-THIN HEAD screw
×2
• M2×8C
×2
4-70 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter
Removing the LCD unit/FL inverter
To remove the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-44 to 4-46.
1. Open the display and make it flat.
2. Remove the mask seals and following screws securing the LCD mask.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
3. Close the display.
4. Insert your fingers into the slits and remove the display rear cover while releasing
latches.
CAUTION: Release the cover latch when removing the display rear cover.
Cover latch
Display rear cover
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
(Applied loctite 425)
Mask seal
Mask seal
Hole
Slit
M2.5×6B FLAT HEAD
(Applied Loctite 425)
Figure 4-44 Removing the display rear cover
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter
5. Peel off two glass tapes on the FL inverter.
6. Disconnect the cables from the both sides of FL inverter and remove the FL inverter.
Glass tape
Cable
FL inverter
Figure 4-45 Removing the FL inverter
4-72 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
7. Remove two glass tapes securing the LCD cable and disconnect the LCD cable from
the connector on the LCD unit.
CAUTION: When removing the LCD cable, be careful not to damage the connector.
8. Remove the following screws and LCD unit.
•
M2×3C
BIND screw
×4
CAUTION: When lifting up the top of the LCD unit, hold the corners of the LCD unit.
The top edge of LCD unit is sensitive area.
M2×3C BIND
Glass tape
LCD unit
LCD cable
M2×3C BIND
Figure 4-46 Removing the LCD unit
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.24 LCD unit/FL inverter
Installing the LCD unit/FL inverter
To install the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-43 to 4-45.
1. Install the LCD unit to the display cover and secure it with the following screws.
•
M2×3C
BIND screw
×4
2. Connect the LCD cable to the connector on the back of the LCD unit. Stick two glass
tapes in place.
3. Connect two cables to the FL inverter and install the FL inverter in place.
4. Stick two glass tapes on the FL inverter in place.
5. Pass the Bluetooth antenna cable and wireless LAN antenna cable through the
hole of the cover assembly.
6. Install the display rear cover while engaging the latches.
7. Apply loctite 425 to the screws.
8. Secure the LCD unit with the following screws and stick two mask seals in place.
•
M2.5×6B
FLAT HEAD screw
×2
4-74 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.25 Cover latch
4 Replacement Procedures
4.25 Cover latch
Removing the Cover latch
To remove the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Remove the latch knob while pushing three hooks.
2. Remove the latch hook.
CAUTION: Be careful not lose the spring.
Latch knob
Hook
Spring
Hook
Latch hook
Figure 4-47 Removing the cover latch
Installing the Cover latch
To install the cover latch, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-47.
1. Insert the stick of the latch hook into the spring.
2. Install the latch hook in place.
3. Set the latch knob and push it until the hooks are engaged to the latch hook.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Removing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To remove the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-48.
1. Peel the insulator and peel off the acetate tapes securing the wireless LAN antenna
cables and Bluetooth antenna cable.
2. Remove the wireless LAN antennas (two or three) and Bluetooth antenna from the
display rear cover.
Acetate tape
Bluetooth antenna
Wireless LAN antenna
Insulator
Acetate tape
Acetate tape
Figure 4-48 Removing the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4-76 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
To install the wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna, follow the steps below and refer to
Figure 4-48.
1. Install the wireless LAN antennas (two or three) and Bluetooth antenna to the
display cover.
2. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth antenna cable on the
display rear cover and secure it with the insulator and acetate tapes.
CAUTION: Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth antenna cable with
care of the followings:
(Upper right)
Peel off the separator of the Wireless LAN antenna (black cable) and stick
the wireless LAN antenna (black cable) to the display rear cover.
Wireless LAN antenna (black cable)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Center right)
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (black) and Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown), and stick three acetate tapes in place.
Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown)
Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
Acetate tape
1. Arrange the Bluetooth antenna cable (brown).
2. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (black).
3. Secure the Bluetooth antenna cable (brown) and Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
with the three acetate tapes.
* When arranging the cables, be careful not to put the cables on top of each other.
4-78 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Lower right)
Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (black) and Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown), and stick two acetate tapes in place.
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown)
Acetate tape
Stand
Ruled line
1. Stick the acetate tape (4), aligning it with the stand.
2. Stick the acetate tape (5) in place.
* When arranging the cables, be careful not to put the cables on top of each other.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Right side)
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Bluetooth antenna
(brown cable)
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna (black cable)
Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown)
Acetate tape
4-80 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Lower center)
Secure the wireless LAN antenna cables and Bluetooth antenna cable with
the insulator.
Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown)
Insulator
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (white)
Wireless LAN antenna cable (black)
Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown)
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Insulator
Wireless LAN
antenna cable
(white)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Lower center)
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables (white and gray) and stick two
acetate tapes in place.
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Rubber cushion
Wireless LAN antenna cable (white)
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna cable (gray)
Rib
Wireless LAN
antenna cable
(white)
1. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables (white and gray) while aligning them to the
rubber cushion and secure them with the acetate tape (6).
2. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables (white and gray) while aligning them to the rib
and secure them with the acetate tape (7).
* When arranging the cables, be careful not to put the cables on top of each other.
4-82 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Upper left)
Peel off the separators of the Wireless LAN antennas (white cable and gray
cable) and stick the wireless LAN antenna (white cable and gray cable) to
the display rear cover.
Wireless LAN antenna (white cable)
Wireless LAN antenna (gray cable)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Left side)
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables (white and gray) and stick three
acetate tapes in place.
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (white)
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (white)
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
1. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (gray).
2. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (white).
3. Secure the Wireless LAN antenna cables by the three acetate tapes.
* When arranging the cables, be careful not to put the cables on top of each other.
4-84 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (Lower left)
Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cable (black) and Bluetooth antenna
cable (brown), and stick two acetate tapes in place.
Arrange the
cables
outside.
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (white)
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Acetate tape
Ruled line
1. Stick the acetate tape (11) in place.
2. Stick the acetate tape (12) in place.
* When arranging the cables, be careful not to put the cables on top of each other.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
CAUTION: (left side)
4.26 Wireless LAN antenna/Bluetooth antenna
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (white)
Acetate tape
Wireless LAN antenna
cable (gray)
Acetate tape
Acetate tape
4-86 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.27 LCD cable
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 LCD cable
Removing the LCD cable
To remove the LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-49.
1. Pass the LCD cable and the connector through the hole of the cover assembly and
remove the LCD cable from the cover assembly.
Connector
LCD cable
Hole
Hook
Figure 4-49 Removing the LCD cable
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 LCD cable
Installing the LCD cable
To install the LCD cable, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-49.
1. Arrange the LCD cable to the hook of the cover assembly on the front.
2. Pass the LCD cable and the connector through the hole of the cover assembly and
arrange the LCD cable along the guides of the cover assembly on the back.
4-88 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.28 Hinge
4 Replacement Procedures
4.28 Hinge
Removing the Hinge
To remove the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-50 and 4-51.
1. Remove the following screws.
•
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
Tapping screw
×2
M2.5×6C
×4
2. Stand the LCD mask and remove it.
CAUTION: When standing the LCD mask, be careful not to hold the top portion.
M2.5×6C Tapping
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
LCD mask
M2.5×6C Tapping
M2.5×6C Tapping
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
Figure 4-50 Removing the LCD mask
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.28 Hinge
3. Remove the following screws securing the right hinge.
•
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
Tapping screw
×1
M2.5×6C
×1
4. Release two hooks and slide the right hinge inside to remove it through the hole.
5. Remove the following screw securing the left hinge.
•
M2.5×6C
Tapping screw
×1
6. Release the hook and slide the left hinge inside to remove it through the hole.
M2.5×4B FLAT HEAD
M2.5×6C Tapping
Hook
Hinge (right)
M2.5×6C Tapping
Hinge (left)
Figure 4-51 Removing the hinge
4-90 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.28 Hinge
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the Hinge
To install the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-50 and 4-51.
1. Install the left hinge while engaging the hook and secure it with the following screw.
•
M2.5×6C
Tapping screw
×1
2. Install the right hinge while engaging two hooks and secure it with the following
screws.
•
•
M2.5×6C
Tapping screw
×1
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
×1
3. Install the LCD mask and lay it down.
CAUTION: When laying the LCD mask down, be careful not to hold the top portion.
4. Secure the LCD mask with the following screws.
•
•
M2.5×4B
FLAT HEAD screw
Tapping screw
×2
M2.5×6C
×4
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.29 Speaker
4.29 Speaker
Removing the Speaker
To remove the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-52 to 4-54.
1. Peel off the insulator and pass the speaker cable through the hole of the cover
assembly.
2. Remove the speakers from the slots and pass them through the holes of the cover
assembly.
Speaker cable
Speaker (right)
Hole
* Be careful of the
direction, when
installing.
Insulator
Hole
Figure 4-52 Removing the speaker (1)
4-92 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Speaker
4 Replacement Procedures
Speaker (left)
* Be careful of the direction,
when installing.
Hole
Figure 4-53 Removing the speaker (2)
3. Separate the speakers (left and right) and speaker covers (left and right).
Speaker cover
* Be careful of the
direction, when installing.
Speaker (View from the back)
Figure 4-54 Removing the speaker (3)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.29 Speaker
Installing the Speaker
To install the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to Figure 4-52 to 4-55.
1. Install the speakers (left and right) to the speaker covers (left and right).
2. Arrange the speaker cable into the slot of the front of the cover assembly.
3. Pass the speakers through the holes of the cover assembly.
Hole
Speaker cable (White and green)
Speaker cable (Black and red)
Speaker (left)
Speaker (right)
Hole
Figure 4-55 Installing the speaker
4. Install the speakers (left and right) to the slots (left and right).
5. Pass the speaker cable through the hole of the cover assembly and stick the
insulator in place.
4-94 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
4
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
This system uses LCD modules from the following suppliers. The procedure for replacing
the fluorescent lamp is different for each LCD module. Refer to the appropriate procedure.
Type
Part No.
Supplier
Section
15.4-inch (WXGA)
G33C0003F110
4.30.1
SAMSUNG
15.4-inch (WSXGA+)
G33C0003Z110
4.30.2
NOTE: - When working with a LCD module, always use a flat, grounded table.
- Handle the backlight unit in the environment without dust, such as on the clean
bench. Keep the worktable free from any screws or other material that may
scratch the LCD surface.
- Use an anti-static or protective sheet.
- When replacing the FL unit, cover with a finger protector or similar to prevent
soiling or scratching the LCD panel.
- Be careful when handling the lamp. Excessive force may break the lamp.
- Be careful not to soil or deform the lamp reflector.
- Make sure that the power of the LCD module is turned off before connecting or
disconnecting cables and connectors.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4.30.1 Replacing the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung Fluorescent Lamp
To replace the 15.4-inch WXGA Samsung fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and refer
to figures 4-56 to 4-59.
Removing the fluorescent lamp
1. Remove the PCB cover.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage COF of S/D ICs.
PCB cover
Figure 4-56 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (1)
4-96 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
2. Remove the yellow tapes, lamp-wire tape and Al tape.
Yellow tape (right)
Yellow tape (left)
Bottom Al tape
Lamp-wire tape
Figure 4-57 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (2)
3. Remove the top chassis from the molded frame.
CAUTION: Remove in the order of bottom hook and side hook.
Figure 4-58 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (3)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4. Separate the panel assembly and backlight unit.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage COF of S/D ICs.
Panel assembly
Figure 4-59 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WXGA) (4)
4-98 [CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Assembling the fluorescent lamp
The assembly procedure of the 15.4-inch Samsung fluorescent lamp is the reverse of the
above disassembly procedure. Refer to figures 4-56 to 4-59.
1. Install the panel assembly on the backlight unit.
2. Install the top chassis on the molded frame.
3. Stick the yellow tapes, lamp-wire tape and Al tape.
4. Stick the PCB cover.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL] 4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4.30.2 Replacing the 15.4-inch WSXGA+ Samsung Fluorescent Lamp
To replace the 15.4-inch WSXGA+ Samsung fluorescent lamp, follow the steps below and
refer to figures 4-60 to 4-63.
Removing the fluorescent lamp
1. Remove the PCB cover.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage COF of S/D and G/D ICs.
PCB cover
Figure 4-60 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WSXGA+) (1)
4-100 [CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
2. Remove the white tapes, lamp-wire tape and Al tape.
White tape (right)
White tape (left)
Lamp-wire tape
Bottom Al tape
Figure 4-61 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WSXGA+) (2)
3. Separate the top chassis and molded frame.
CAUTION: Remove in the order of bottom hook and side hooks.
Figure 4-62 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WSXGA+) (3)
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4. Separate the panel assembly and backlight unit.
CAUTION: Handle with care not to damage COF of S/D and G/D ICs.
Panel assembly
Figure 4-63 Replacing Samsung fluorescent lamp (WSXGA+) (4)
4-102 [CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4 Replacement Procedure
Assembling the fluorescent lamp
The assembly procedure of the 15.4-inch Samsung fluorescent lamp is the reverse of the
above disassembly procedure. Refer to figures 4-60 to 4-63.
1. Install the panel assembly on the backlight unit.
2. Install the top chassis on the molded frame.
3. Stick white tapes, lamp-wire tape and Al tape.
4. Stick the PCB cover.
TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633) [CONFIDENTIAL]4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedure
4.30 Fluorescent Lamp
4-104 [CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9/TECRA S5/TECRA P5/Satellite Pro S200 Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
App-ii
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix
Contents
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ...........................................................................A-1
Appendix B Board Layout.................................................................................................B-1
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
System Board (FHMLS *) Front View..................................................................B-1
System Board (FHMLS *) Back View...................................................................B-3
Serial & RGB Board (FHMLR*) Front View.........................................................B-5
Fingerprint sensor Board (FHMLF*) Front and Back View.................................B-6
Appendix C Pin Assignments ............................................................................................C-1
System board (FHMLS*)
C.1
CN1400 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin) ...........................................................C-1
CN1410 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin) ...........................................................C-4
CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin) .........................................................C-7
CN1900 HDD(SATA) interface connector (11-pin) .............................................C-8
CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin) .....................................................C-9
IS2150 Bridge Media interface connector (46-pin)............................................C-10
CN2300 Docking interface connector (133-pin) ................................................C-11
CN2600 Mini PCI Express interface connector (52-pin) ...................................C-14
CN2650 Mini PCI Express I/F connector(Robson) (52-pin)..............................C-15
CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin).......................................................C-16
CN3230 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) ................................................C-16
CN3240 Dual Point interface connector (8-pin).................................................C-17
CN3490 Debug Port interface connector (8-pin)................................................C-17
CN4100 LAN interface connector (14-pin)........................................................C-17
CN4230 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin) ................................................C-18
CN4400 Bluetooth1 interface connector (20-pin) ..............................................C-18
CN4440 Bluetooth2 interface connector (20-pin) ..............................................C-19
CN4610 USB port 4 connector (8-pin)...............................................................C-19
CN4612 USB port 6 connector (8-pin)...............................................................C-19
CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin)........................................................C-20
CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin) ................................................C-21
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
C.10
C.11
C.12
C.13
C.14
C.15
C.16
C.17
C.18
C.19
C.20
C.21
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
App-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
C.22
C.23
C.24
C.25
C.26
C.27
C.28
C.29
C.30
C.31
C.32
C.32
J6051 External microphone connector (6-pin) ...................................................C-21
CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin) ....................................................................C-21
J6310 Headphone connector (6-pin)...................................................................C-22
CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin) ..........................................................C-22
CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)......................................................................C-22
CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)..........................................................C-22
CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin).............................................................C-23
CN9500 Serial & RGB board I/F connector (40-pin).........................................C-23
CN9540 Web Camera interface connector (3-pin)..............................................C-24
CN9550 Fingerprint sensor board interface connector (8-pin)...........................C-24
CN9721 Switch interface connector (13-pin).....................................................C-24
CN9721 Switch interface connector (13-pin).....................................................C-24
Serial & RGB board (FHMLR*)
C.33
C.34
C.35
CN5080 RGB interface connector (15-pin)........................................................C-25
CN9600 System board(FHMLS*)interface connector (40-pin) .........................C-25
CN9601 Serial interface connector (9-pin).........................................................C-26
Fingerprint Sensor board (FHMLF*)
C.36
CN9650 System board(FHMLS*) interface connector (8-pin) ..........................C-26
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes ................................................................D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
E.1
E.2
United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard .......................................................................... E-1
United States (US) Keyboard................................................................................. E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................................... F-1
F.1
F.2
F.3
F.4
F.5
RGB Monitor Loopback Connector........................................................................ F-1
RS-232C Loopback Connector ............................................................................... F-1
RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 9-pin) .................................................. F-2
RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 25-pin) ................................................ F-2
LAN Loopback Connector..................................................................................... F-3
Appendix G BIOS rewrite Procedures ............................................................................ G-1
App-iv
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite Procedures....................................................................... H-1
Appendix I Reliability .........................................................................................................I-1
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
App-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Figures
Figure B-1
Figure B-2
Figure B-3
Figure B-4
Figure B-5
System board (FDBGS*) layout (front) .......................................................B-1
System board (FDBGS*) layout (back) .......................................................B-3
GN board (FDBGN*) layout (front/back)....................................................B-5
GR board (FDBGR*) layout (front/back) ....................................................B-6
GF board (FDBGF*) layout (front/back).....................................................B-7
Figure E-1
Figure E-2
UK keyboard.................................................................................................. E-1
US keyboard................................................................................................... E-1
Figure F-1
Figure F-2
Serial port wraparound connector.................................................................. F-1
LAN loopback connector............................................................................... F-1
Tables
Table B-1 System board (FDBGS*) ICs and connectors (front).....................................B-2
Table B-2 System board (FDBGS*) connectors (back) ..................................................B-4
Table B-3 GN board (FDBGN*) connectors (front/back)...............................................B-5
Table B-4 GR board (FDBGR*) connector (front)..........................................................B-6
Table B-5 GF board (FDBGF*) connectors (back).........................................................B-7
System board
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin) .....................................................................C-1
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin) .....................................................................C-4
Table C-3 Select bay interface connector (72-pin) ...........................................................C-7
Table C-4 SATA interface connector (11-pin)...................................................................C-8
Table C-5 PC card interface connector (150-pin) .............................................................C-9
Table C-6 SD card interface connector (12-pin).............................................................C-11
Table C-7 Docking interface connector (240-pin) ..........................................................C-12
Table C-8 Mini PCI Express interface connector (52-pin) .............................................C-15
App-vi
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Table C-9 MDC interface connector (12-pin).................................................................C-16
Table C-10 Modem connector (4-pin)...............................................................................C-16
Table C-11 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin) ..........................................................C-17
Table C-12 PAD interface connector (8-pin) ....................................................................C-17
Table C-13 Parallel interface connector (25-pin)..............................................................C-18
Table C-14 Switch interface connector (13-pin)...............................................................C-18
Table C-15 LAN interface connector (14-pin)..................................................................C-19
Table C-16 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin) ..........................................................C-19
Table C-17 Bluetooth interface connector (20-pin) ..........................................................C-19
Table C-18 USB connector (4-pin) ...................................................................................C-20
Table C-19 LCD interface connector (40-pin)..................................................................C-20
Table C-20 RGB connector (15-pin).................................................................................C-21
Table C-21 DVI/TV interface connector (40-pin) ............................................................C-21
Table C-22 DC-IN connector (4-pin)................................................................................C-22
Table C-23 1st Battery connector (10-pin) .......................................................................C-22
Table C-24 RTC Battery connector (3-pin).......................................................................C-22
Table C-25 FAN interface connector (4-pin) ....................................................................C-22
Table C-26 GN board interface connector (40-pin)..........................................................C-23
Table C-27 GN board interface connector (10-pin)..........................................................C-23
Table C-28 GF board interface connector (8-pin).............................................................C-24
GN Board
Table C-29 System board interface connector (40-pin)....................................................C-25
Table C-30 System board interface connector (10-pin)...................................................C-25
Table C-31 USB interface connector (8-pin) ....................................................................C-26
Table C-32 Internal microphone connector (2-pin) ..........................................................C-26
Table C-33 External microphone connector (6-pin) .........................................................C-26
Table C-34 Speaker connector (4-pin)..............................................................................C-26
Table C-35 Headphone connector (6-pin).........................................................................C-27
GF Board
Table C-36 System board interface connector (8-pin)......................................................C-28
GR Board
Table C-37 System board interface connector (20-pin)....................................................C-29
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
App-vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Table C-38 Serial connector (9-pin)..................................................................................C-29
Table C-39 S-Video connector (4-pin)..............................................................................C-29
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) .............................................................................D-1
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key..........................................................................D-5
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode ..........................................................................D-6
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key....................................................................................D-6
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode.............................................................................D-7
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code.......................................................................................D-7
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code.......................................................................................D-8
Table I-1
MTBF................................................................................................................ I-1
App-viii
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
Appendix A
P
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the
following precautions when handling the LCD module:
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.
2. For the LCD module, be careful to align the four holes at the right side and left side
of the LCD module with the corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing
the module with four screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be carefully when handling it.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.
A-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,
which could cause breakage or cracks.
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the
module.
TECRA M9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.
A-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Appendices
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxime). These materials can release gas that can
damage the panel’s polarization.
TECRA M9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
B.1 System Board (FHMLS*) Front View
Figure B-1 System board (FHMLS*) layout (front)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-1 System board (FHMLS*) connectors (front)
Number
CN2110
CN2600
CN3230
CN3240
CN3490
CN4400
CN4440
CN5000
CN6050
CN6170
CN9300
CN9540
CN9550
CN9721
Name
PC card interface connector
Mini PCI Express interface connector (Wireless LAN)
Keyboard interface connector
Dual Point interface connector
(Debug Port interface connector)
Bluetooth interface connector
(Bluetooth2 interface connector)
LCD interface connector
Internal microphone connector
Speaker interface connector
RTC Battery interface connector
(Web Camera interface connector)
Fingerprint sensor(FHMLF*) board I/F connector
Switch interface connector
B-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
B.2 System Board (FHMLS *) Back View
Figure B-2 System board (FHMLS*) layout (back)
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-2 System board( FHMLS*) ICs and connectors (back)
Number
IS1050
IC1200
IC1600
IC5000
CN1400
CN1410
CN1810
CN1900
IS2140
CN2300
Name
CPU socket
Intel 965GM/GML (Northbridge)
ICH8-M(Southbridge)
nVIDIA G8M
SO-DIMM0 connector A
SO-DIMM0 connector B
ODD interface connector
HDD(SATA) interface connector
Bridge Media interface connector
Docking interface connector
(Mini PCI Express I/F connector (Robson: not
used))
CN2650
CN3010
CN4100
CN4230
CN4610
CN4612
J6051
MDC interface connector
LAN interface connector
IEEE 1394 interface connector
USB port 4 connector
USB port 6 connector
External microphone connector
Headphone connector
J6310
CN8771
CN8800
CN8810
CN9500
FAN interface connector
DC-IN connector
Main Battery connector
Serial & RGB(FHMLR*) board I/F connector
B-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
Appendices
B.3 Serial & RGB Board (FHMLR*) Front View
(front)
Figure B-3 Serial & RGB Board (FHMLR*) layout (front)
Table B-3 Serial & RGB (FHMLR*) connectors (front)
Number
CN5080
CN9600
CN9601
Name
RGB interface connector
System board interface connector
Serial interface connector
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix B Board Layout
B.4 Fingerprint sensor Board (FHMLF*) Front and Back View
(front)
(back)
Figure B-4 Fingerprint sensor Board (FHMLF*) layout (front/back)
Table B-4 Fingerprint sensor Board (FHMLF*) connector (front)
Number
Name
CN9650
System board interface connector
B-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Appendix C
Appendix C Pin Assignments
System board (FHMLS*)
C.1 CN1400 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin)
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
1
MRVREF-B0V
GND
I
2
-
I/O
I/O
-
3
-
4
ADQ04-B1P
ADQ06-B1P
GND
5
ADQ00-B1P
ADQ05-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
ADM0-B1P
GND
I/O
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
ADQS0-B1N
ADQS0-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ07-B1P
ADQ01-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ03-B1P
ADQ02-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ08-B1P
ADQ12-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ14-B1P
ADQ13-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM1-B1P
GND
I
-
ADQS1-B1N
ADQS1-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
XMCK0-B1P
XMCK0-B1N
GND
I
I
-
ADQ15-B1P
ADQ11-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ09-B1P
ADQ10-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
ADQ21-B1P
ADQ20-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ16-B1P
ADQ17-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQS2-B1N
I/O
TSDIMA-P3N
-
（NC）
51
53
55
57
59
61
ADQS2-B1P
GND
I/O
-
52
54
56
58
60
62
ADM2-B1P
GND
I
-
ADQ18-B1P
ADQ23-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ19-B1P
ADQ22-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ28-B1P
I/O
ADQ25-B1P
I/O
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADQ29-B1P
GND
I/O
Pin No.
64
Signal Name
ADQ24-B1P
GND
I/O
63
65
I/O
I/O
-
66
-
67
ADM3-B1P
N.C.
I
68
ADQS3-B1N
ADQS3-B1P
GND
I/O
69
-
70
I/O
71
GND
-
72
-
73
ADQ30-B1P
ADQ27-B1P
GND
I/O
74
ADQ31-B1P
ADQ26-B1P
GND
I/O
75
I/O
76
I/O
77
-
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
78
-
79
MCKE0-B1P
1R8-B1V
80
MCKE1-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
81
82
I
83
N.C.
84
N.C
-
85
ABS2-B1P
1R8-B1V
86
AMA14-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
87
88
I
89
AMA12-B1P
AMA09-B1P
AMA08-B1P
1R8-B1V
90
AMA11-B1P
AMA07-B1P
AMA06-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
91
92
I
93
94
I
95
96
I
97
AMA05-B1P
AMA03-B1P
AMA01-B1P
1R8-B1V
98
AMA04-B1P
AMA02-B1P
AMA00-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
99
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
I
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
I
I
AMA10-B1P
ABS0-B1P
AWE-B1N
1R8-B1V
ABS1-B1P
ARAS-B1N
MCS0-B1N
1R8-B1V
I
I
I
I
ACAS-B1N
MCS1-B1N
1R8-B1V
MODT0-B1P
AMA13-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
I
I
MODT1-B1P
GND
N.C.
-
GND
-
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ36-B1P
ADQ32-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ35-B1P
ADQ33-B1P
GND
ADQS4-B1N
ADQS4-B1P
I/O
I/O
ADM4-B1P
GND
I
-
C-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Table C-1 SO-DIMM0 connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
1T
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
2T
Signal Name
ADQ37-B1P
ADQ34-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ38-B1P
ADQ39-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ41-B1P
ADQ45-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ44-B1P
ADQ40-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQS5-B1N
ADQS5-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM5-B1P
GND
I
-
ADQ42-B1P
ADQ46-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ47-B1P
ADQ43-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ49-B1P
ADQ52-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ48-B1P
ADQ53-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
N.C.
-
XMCK1-B1P
XMCK1-B1N
GND
I
GND
-
I
ADQS6-B1N
ADQS6-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
ADM6-B1P
GND
I
-
ADQ51-B1P
ADQ50-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ55-B1P
ADQ54-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ58-B1P
ADQ62-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ61-B1P
ADQ60-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADM7-B1P
GND
I
ADQS7-B1N
ADQS7-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
ADQ59-B1P
ADQ63-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
ADQ56-B1P
ADQ57-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SMBDT1-E3P
SMBCK1-E3P
M-E3V
I/O
I/O
I
GND
-
GND
I
GND
-
GND
-
3T
GND
-
4T
GND
-
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.2 CN1410 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin)
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
1
MRVREF-B0V
GND
I
2
-
3
-
4
BDQ01-B1P
BDQ00-B1P
GND
I/O
5
BDQ04-B1P
BDQ05-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
6
I/O
7
8
-
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
BDM0-B1P
GND
I
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
BDQS0-B1N
BDQS0-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDQ07-B1P
BDQ06-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
BDQ03-B1P
BDQ02-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDQ11-B1P
BDQ08-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
BDQ13-B1P
BDQ12-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDM1-B1P
GND
I
-
BDQS1-B1N
BDQS1-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
XMCK3-B1P
XMCK3-B1N
GND
I
I
-
BDQ10-B1P
BDQ09-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ15-B1P
BDQ14-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
BDQ21-B1P
BDQ22-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ16-B1P
BDQ20-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQS2-B1N
I/O
TSDIMB-P3N
(NC)
-
51
53
55
57
59
61
BDQS2-B1P
GND
I/O
-
52
54
56
58
60
62
BDM2-B1P
GND
I
-
BDQ19-B1P
BDQ17-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ23-B1P
BDQ18-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ24-B1P
I/O
BDQ25-B1P
I/O
C-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.
63
Signal Name
BDQ29-B1P
GND
I/O
Pin No.
64
Signal Name
BDQ28-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
65
-
66
-
67
BDM3-B1P
N.C.
I
68
BDQS3-B1N
BDQS3-B1P
GND
I/O
69
-
70
I/O
71
GND
-
72
-
73
BDQ31-B1P
BDQ30-B1P
GND
I/O
74
BDQ27-B1P
BDQ26-B1P
GND
I/O
75
I/O
76
I/O
77
-
78
-
79
MCKE3-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
80
MCKE4-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
81
I
82
I
83
N.C.
-
84
N.C
-
85
BBS2-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
86
BMA14-B1P
1R8-B1V
-
87
I
88
I
89
BMA12-B1P
BMA09-B1P
BMA08-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
90
BMA11-B1P
BMA07-B1P
BMA06-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
91
I
92
I
93
I
94
I
95
I
96
I
97
BMA05-B1P
BMA03-B1P
BMA01-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
98
BMA04-B1P
BMA02-B1P
BMA00-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
99
I
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
134
I
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
I
I
I
I
BMA10-B1P
BBS0-B1P
BWE-B1N
1R8-B1V
I
BBS1-B1P
BRAS-B1N
MCS2-B1N
1R8-B1V
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BCAS-B1N
MCS3-B1N
1R8-B1V
I
MODT2-B1P
BMA13-B1P
1R8-B1V
I
I
I
I
I
-
MODT3-B1P
GND
I
N.C
-
GND
-
BDQ38-B1P
BDQ36-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ39-B1P
BDQ37-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQS4-B1N
BDQS4-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM4-B1P
GND
I
-
BDQ34-B1P
I/O
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Table C-2 SO-DIMM1 connector (200-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
BDQ35-B1P
BDQ33-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
Pin No.
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
2T
Signal Name
BDQ32-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
1T
BDQ43-B1P
BDQ46-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ40-B1P
BDQ45-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQS5-B1N
BDQS5-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM5-B1P
GND
I
-
BDQ47-B1P
BDQ41-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ42-B1P
BDQ44-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ52-B1P
BDQ49-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ55-B1P
BDQ50-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
N.C.
-
XMCK4-B1P
XMCK4-B1N
GND
I
GND
-
I
BDQS6-B1N
BDQS6-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDM6-B1P
GND
I
-
BDQ53-B1P
BDQ48-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ54-B1P
BDQ51-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ56-B1P
BDQ57-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ62-B1P
BDQ63-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDM7-B1P
GND
I
BDQS7-B1N
BDQS7-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
BDQ60-B1P
BDQ61-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
BDQ59-B1P
BDQ58-B1P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SMBDT1-E3P
SMBCK1-E3P
M-E3V
I/O
I/O
I
GND
-
M-E3V
I
GND
-
GND
-
C-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.3 CN1810 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Table C-3 ODD interface connector (50-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
I/O
-
-
3
-
4
RLTRS3&RSTIDB
PDD07-P3P
PDD06-P3P
PDD05-P3P
PDD04-P3P
PDD03-P3P
PDD02-P3P
PDD01-P3P
PDD00-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
5
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
6
PDD08-P3P
PDD09-P3P
PDD10-P3P
PDD11-P3P
PDD12-P3P
PDD13-P3P
PDD14-P3P
PDD15-P3P
PDDREQ-P3P
PDIOR-P3N
GND
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
O
-
PDIOW-P3N
PIORDY-P3P
IDEIRQ-P3P
PDA1-P3P
O
I
O
-
PDDACK-P3N
I
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
PDA0-P3P
PDA2-P3P
PDCS3-P3N
P5V
PDCS1-P3N
P5V
P5V
GND
GND
-
P5V
-
-
P5V
-
-
GND
-
-
GND
-
-
GND
-
-
-
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.4 CN1900 HDD(SATA) interface connector (11-pin)
Table C-4 HDD(SATA) interface connector (11-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZSATT0-P1P
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZSATT0-P1N
ZSATR0-P1N
GND
I/O
1
3
O
-
2
4
O
I
-
5
ZSATR0-P1P
P3V
I
6
-
-
7
8
GND
-
-
9
P5V
10
GND
-
11
1T
3T
GND
-
-
-
GND
2T
4T
GND
GND
-
GND
C-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.5 CN2110 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Table C-5 PC card interface connector (70-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
ACAD00-PYP
ACAD03-PYP
ACAD07-PYP
ACAD09-PYP
ACAD12-PYP
ACCBE1-PYN
ACPERR-PYN
ACINT-PYN
MCVPPA-PYV
ACIRDY-PYN
ACAD18-PYP
ACAD21-PYP
ACAD23-PYP
ACAD25-PYP
ACAD27-PYP
ACD02-PYP
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
3
ACAD01-PYP
ACAD05-PYP
ACCBE0-PYN
ACAD11-PYP
ACAD14-PYP
ACPAR-PYP
ACGNT-PYN
MCVCCA-PYV
ACCLK-PYP
ACCBE2-PYN
ACAD20-PYP
ACAD22-PYP
ACAD24-PYP
ACAD26-PYP
ACAD29-PYP
ACCLKR-PYN
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
ACCD1-P3N
ACAD04-PYP
ACD14-PYP
ACAD10-PYP
ACAD13-PYP
ACAD16-PYP
ACLOCK-PYN
ACDEVS-PYN
MCVPPA-PYV
ACFRAM-PYN
ACAD19-PYP
ACRST-PYN
ACREQ-PYN
ACAUDI-PYP
ACAD28-PYP
ACAD31-PYP
GND
O
ACAD02-PYP
ACAD06-PYP
ACAD08-PYP
ACVS1-P3P
ACAD15-PYP
ACA18-PYP
ACSTOP-PYN
MCVCCA-PYV
ACTRDY-PYN
ACAD17-PYP
ACVS2-P3P
ACSERR-PYN
ACCBE3-PYN
ACSTSC-PYP
ACAD30-PYP
ACCD2-P3N
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
O
-
GND
-
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.6 IS2150 Bridge Media interface connector (46-pin)
Table C-6 Bridge Media interface connector (46-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
SDCD-P3N
I/O
O
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
I/O
-
3
MSDAT1-P3P
4
MSSDIO-P3P
GND
5
6
7
-
8
MSCLK-P3P
MSBS-P3P
MSSDIO-P3P
MSCD-P3N
MSCLK-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
9
GND
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
2T
4T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
1T
3T
MSDAT1-P3P
MSDAT2-P3P
MSDAT3-P3P
FM-P3V
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
-
FM-P3V
-
GND
-
-
MSBS-P3P
MSDAT3-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
MSDAT2-P3P
GND
I/O
-
MXDCD-P3N
MXDRE-P3N
SMCLE-P3P
MXDWE-P3N
GND
I
SMRDY-P3P
MXDCE-P3N
SDCMD-P3P
MSCLK-P3P
MSSDIO-P3P
MSDAT2-P3P
SDAT0-P3P
SDAT2-P3P
FM-P3V
I
I
I
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
-
MSDAT1-P3P
MSDAT3-P3P
SDAT1-P3P
SDAT3-P3P
SDWP-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
-
GND
-
GND
GND
C-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.7 CN2300 Docking interface connector (133-pin)
Table C-7 Docking interface connector (133-pin) (1/3)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
DCOUT
I/O
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
DCOUT
I/O
I
O
-
I
-
3
DOCDT1-S3N
4
GND
-
5
NC
6
NC
-
-
7
NC
8
NC
-
I/O
-
9
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
ZUSBDC-E3P
I/O
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
ZUSBDC-E3N
GND
-
GND
NC
-
-
NC
GND
-
-
NC
NC
-
-
GND
GND
-
I
GND
ZNDTX2-P3P
I
-
ZNDTX2-P3N
GND
I
I
ZNDTX1-P3P
ZNDTX1-P3N
-
O
-
GND
DVIDET-P3N
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DCOUT
NC
-
I
-
DCOUT
NC
-
I
-
-
-
NC
-
-
NC
GND
-
-
NC
GND
O
-
-
DPCONF-S5P
GND
GND
I
XNDCK0-P3N
GND
I
-
XNDCK0-P3P
NC
-
-
NC
-
I
GND
ZNDTX0-P3P
GND
I
-
ZNDTX0-P3N
GND
-
-
GND
-
I/O
I
GND
NVBSCL-P3P
LAN-E3V
-
I/O
O
-
NVBSDA-P3P
LINK-E3N
-
-
-
-
ZBIDDP-EXP
ZBIDDN-EXN
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Table C-7 Docking interface connector (133-pin) (2/3)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZBIDCN-EXN
DCOUT
PWRSW-S3N
NC
I/O
Pin No.
70
Signal Name
ZBIDCP-EXP
DCOUT
DDCON-P5P
NC
I/O
69
71
I
72
I
I
73
O
74
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
75
-
76
-
77
GND
78
GND
-
79
GND
80
NC
-
81
GND
82
GND
-
83
GND
84
GND
-
85
NC
86
GND
-
87
NC
88
GND
-
89
GND
90
DBLUE-PXP
DRED-PXP
GND
-
91
GND
92
I
-
93
GND
94
95
DCRTSD-P3P
GND
I/O
96
DCRTSC-P3P
ACT-E3N
-
I/O
97
-
98
O
99
-
-
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
126
128
130
132
-
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
-
-
ZBIDBN-EXN
ZBIDAN-EXN
DCOUT
EJCTRQ-S3N
NC
I
ZBIDBP-EXP
ZBIDAP-EXP
DCOUT
M5V
I
O
O
I
I
O
I
-
NC
-
GND
-
DHSYNC-P3P
GND
I/O
DVSYNC-P3P
GND
I/O
-
-
-
-
NC
NC
-
-
GND
GND
-
-
GND
NC
-
NC
GND
-
-
GND
DGREEN-PXP
GND
I
-
-
GND
GND
-
PSCL-S5P
GND
I/O
-
PSDA-S5P
DOCDT2-S3N
I/O
O
C-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Table C-7 Docking interface connector (133-pin) (3/3)
Pin No.
A1
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
A2
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3
DSKDC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
A4
1T
2T
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
3T
4T
5T
6T
7T
8T
9T
10T
12T
14T
16T
18T
11T
13T
15T
17T
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.8 CN2600 Mini PCI Express I/F connector (W-LAN)(52-pin)
Table C-8 Mini PCI Express interface connector (52-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
PEWAKE-E3N
WCHDAT-P3P
WCHCLK-P3P
MPEXRQ-P3N
GND
I/O
O
O
O
I
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
P3V
I/O
I
3
4
GND
-
5
6
1R5-P1V
NC
I
7
8
-
9
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
2T
NC
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
1T
XPEMPE-P0N
XPEMPE-P0P
GND
O
O
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
NC
-
GND
-
NC
-
WLRFON-S3N
PLTRS3-E3N
E3V
O
GND
-
-
ZERWL-P1N
ZERWL-P1P
GND
I
I
I
GND
-
-
1R5-P1V
NC
I
GND
-
-
ZETWL-P1N
ZETWL-P1P
GND
O
O
-
NC
-
GND
-
ZUSBWL-E3N
ZUSBWL-E3P
GND
I/O
GND
-
I/O
NC
-
-
-
-
-
I
NC
-
NC
GND
-
NC
XCLCK1-E1P
CLDAT1-E1P
CLRST1-E3N
NC
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
NC
1R5-P1V
GND
-
I
P3V
GND
-
GND
-
C-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.9 CN2650 Mini PCI Express I/F connector(Robson) (52-pin)
Table C-9 Mini PCI Express interface connector (52-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
P3V
I/O
3
4
GND
5
6
1R5-P1V
7
ROBXRQ-P3N
GND
I
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
2T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
1T
XPEROB-P0N
XPEROB-P0P
GND
I
I
GND
GND
PLTRS2-E3N
O
O
ZERROB-P1N
ZERROB-P1P
GND
O
O
ROBMDL-P3N
1R5-P1V
GND
SIG42832
SIG42833
GND
I
I
GND
GND
GND
1R5-P1V
GND
P3V
GND
GND
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.10 CN3010 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Table C-10 MDC interface connector (12-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
2
4
-
-
I
I/O
-
AZSDO1-P3P
GND
NC
5
6
E3V
7
8
-
-
I
AZSYC1-P3P
(IC3010-1)
AZRST1-E3N
GND
GND
9
10
12
2T
4T
6T
I/O
GND
11
1T
3T
5T
XAZBC1-P3P
GND
-
-
-
-
-
-
GND
GND
GND
GND
C.11 CN3230 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Table C-11 Keyboard interface connector (34-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
P5V
I/O
-
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
SPY-PXP
I/O
O
O
I
-
3
SP-GND
4
SPX-PXP
-
5
SP-P5V
6
P5V
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
7
KBSC14-S3N
KBSC12-S3N
KBSC07-S3N
KBSC01-S3N
KBSC08-S3N
KBSC04-S3N
KBSC02-S3N
KBSC09-S3N
KBRT00-S3N
KBRT04-S3N
KBRT05-S3N
KBRT02-S3N
P5V
8
KBSC13-S3N
KBSC15-S3N
KBSC11-S3N
KBSC10-S3N
KBSC06-S3N
KBSC05-S3N
KBSC03-S3N
KBSC00-S3N
KBRT07-S3N
KBRT01-S3N
KBRT03-S3N
KBRT06-S3N
CAPLED-P5N
NUMLED-P5N
GND
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
2T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
1T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
-
O
-
ARWLED-P5N
GND
C-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.12 CN3240 Dual Point interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-12 Dual Point interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
SP-P5V
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPX-PXP
SP-GND
IPDCLK-P5P
P5V
I/O
O
-
1
3
2
4
SPY-PXP
GND
O
-
5
6
I/O
I
7
IPDDAT-P5P
GND
I/O
-
8
1T
2T
GND
-
C.13 CN3490 Debug Port interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-13 Debug Port interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
SP-P5V
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPX-PXP
SP-GND
IPDCLK-P5P
P5V
I/O
O
-
1
3
2
4
SPY-PXP
GND
O
-
5
6
I/O
I
7
IPDDAT-P5P
GND
I/O
-
8
1T
2T
GND
-
C.14 CN4100 LAN interface connector (14-pin)
Table C-14 LAN interface connector (14-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ACT-E3N
I/O
O
I
Pin No.
Signal Name
LINK-E3N
I/O
O
I
1
3
2
4
LNP-E3V
LNP-E3V
5
6
7
8
ZBIDCN-EXN
ZBIDCN-EXN
ZBIDAP-EXP
ZBIDBP-EXP
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
ZBIDDP-EXP
ZBIDCP-EXP
ZBIDAN-EXN
ZBIDBN-EXN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
9
10
12
14
11
13
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.15 CN4230 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-15 IEEE 1394 interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZTPB0-P3N
ZTPA0-P3N
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZTPB0-P3P
ZTPA0-P3P
GND
I/O
1
3
I/O
I/O
-
2
4
I/O
I/O
-
1T
3T
2T
4T
-
-
GND
GND
C.16 CN4400 Bluetooth1 interface connector (20-pin)
Table C-16 Bluetooth1 interface connector (20-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
-
O
-
2
4
-
-
BTMDL1-P3N
NC
5
NC
6
NC
-
7
NC
-
8
BTRST1-S3N
NC
I
9
NC
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
2T
-
11
13
15
17
19
1T
GND
(GND)
NC
-
NC
-
-
WCHCL1-P3P
ZUSBBT-E3P
WCHDA1-P3P
BT1-P3V
GND
O
I/O
I
-
ZUSBBT-E3N
NC
I/O
-
-
GND
-
-
C-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.17 CN4440 Bluetooth2 interface connector (20-pin)
Table C-17 Bluetooth2 interface connector (20-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBB2-E3P
WCHCL2-P3P
BTRST2-S3N
BT2-P3V
I/O
I/O
O
O
-
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
ZUSBB2-E3N
BTMDL2-P3N
WCHDA2-P3P
(GND)
I/O
I
6
O
-
8
10
GND
-
C.18 CN4610 USB port 4 connector (8-pin)
Table C-18 USB port 4 connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
USB0PS-E5V
ZUSBP0-E3P
USB0PS-E5V
ZUSBP4-E3P
GND
I/O
O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBP0-E3N
GND
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
I/O
O
5
6
ZUSBP4-E3N
GND
I/O
-
7
I/O
-
8
1T
2T
GND
--
C.19 CN4612 USB port 6 connector (8-pin)
Table C-19 USB port 6 connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V
USB1PS-E5V
ZUSBP6-E3P
GND
I/O
O
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
USB1PS-E5V
ZUSBP6-E3N
GND
I/O
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
I/O
-
-
-
-
GND
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.20 CN5000 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Table C-20 LCD interface connector (40-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
FL-P5V
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
FL-P5V
I/O
1
I
2
I
-
3
FL-P5V
I
4
NC
5
GND
-
6
GND
-
7
GND
-
8
(BRT2DA-S3P)
(BRT0)
-
9
(BRT10-P5P)
GND
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
2T
4T
6T
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
1T
3T
5T
-
PNL-P3V
P3V
I
PNL-P3V
TSCL-P3P
ZTXDA0-PYN
GND
I
I
I/O
TSDA-P3P
ZTXDA0-PYP
ZTXDA1-PYN
GND
I/O
I
I
-
I
I
-
I
ZTXDA1-PYP
ZTXDA2-PYN
GND
-
ZTXDA2-PYP
XTXCKA-PYN
GND
I
I
XTXCKA-PYP
ZTXDB0-PYN
GND
-
I
-
I
ZTXDB0-PYP
ZTXDB1-PYN
GND
I
I
ZTXDB1-PYP
ZTXDB2-PYN
GND
-
I
ZTXDB2-PYP
XTXCKB-PYN
GND
I
-
I
I
XTXCKB-PYP
GND
-
-
-
-
GND
-
GND
GND
-
GND
GND
-
C-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.21 CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Table C-21 Internal microphone connector (2-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
1
(IMICIN-PXP)
I
2
-
C.22 J6051 External microphone connector (6-pin)
Table C-22External Microphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
(EMICIN-PXP)
A-GND
I/O
1
3
5
-
-
I
2
4
6
-
-
I
(EMICB-P2V)
DETCTA-P4N
EMICB-P2V
C.23 CN6170 Speaker connector (4-pin)
Table C-23 Speaker (Right) connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPOTL-PXN
SPOTR-PXP
I/O
O
Pin No.
Signal Name
SPOTL-PXP
SPOTR-PXN
I/O
O
1
3
2
4
O
O
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.24 J6310 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Table C-24 Headphone connector (6-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
A-GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
HEADL-PXP
DETCTA-P4N
NC
I/O
O
O
-
1
3
5
2
4
6
HEADR-PXP
A-GND
O
-
C.25 CN8771 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Table C-25 FAN interface connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
P5V
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
1
3
-
-
2
4
FANGO-E3P
FPWMO-S3P
I
O
C.26 CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Table C-26 DC-IN connector (4-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADPDC
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ADPDC
GND
I/O
1
3
-
-
2
4
-
-
C.27 CN8810 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Table C-27 Main Battery connector (10-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
(Q8811-1)
(Q8811-4)
PSCL-S5P
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
BTMP1
I/O
1
3
5
7
9
-
-
2
4
I
M5V
I
I/O
I
I/O
-
6
PSDA-S5P
DBT1OV-S5N
GND
8
GND
-
10
-
C-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
C.28 CN9300 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Table C-28 RTC Battery connector (3-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
(R3V)
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
1
3
-
-
-
2
-
GND
GND
1T
2T
GND
-
C.29 CN9500 Serial & RGB board(FHMLR*) I/F connector (40-pin)
Table C-29 Serial & RGB board I/F connector (40-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
GND
I/O
3
4
P5V
P5V
P5V
P5V
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
GND
GND
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
CRT1SD-P5P
M1VSYN-P3P
CRT1SC-P5P
M1HSYN-P3P
O
O
O
O
GND
DTR-PYP
TXD-PYN
DSR-PYP
I
I
O
O
RTS-PYP
RXD-PYN
GND
CTS-PYP
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
O
O
O
DCD-PYP
RING-PYP
GND
MBLUE-PXP
M1GRN-PXP
M1RED-PXP
GND
O
O
O
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.30 CN9540 Web Camera interface connector (3-pin)
Table C-30 Web Camera interface connector (3-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
P5V
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBCM-E3N
GND
I/O
1
3
5
-
I
2
4
6
I
-
-
ZUSBCM-E3P
GND
GND
-
C.31 CN9550 Fingerprint sensor board interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-31 System board interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
ZUSBFS-E3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
ZUSBFS-E3N
FGSPON-S3N
I/O
I
5
6
E3V
I
7
8
GND
1T
GND
-
2T
GND
-
C.32 CN9721 Switch interface connector (13-pin)
Table C-32 Switch interface connector (13-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
S3V
I/O
PNLOFF-S3N
1
3
I
2
4
-
-
GND
5
6
PWRSW-S3N
7
I
8
GPBTNA-S3N
GND
9
10
12
I
11
13
1T
GPBTNB-S3N
GND
I
-
2T
-
C-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignments
Appendices
Serial & RGB board (FHMLR*)
C.33 CN5080 RGB interface connector (15-pin)
Table C-33 RGB interface connector (15-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
MRED-PXP
MBLU-PXP
GND
I/O
O
O
-
Pin No.
Signal Name
MGRN-PXP
NC
I/O
O
-
1
3
2
4
5
6
GND
-
7
GND
-
8
GND
-
9
P5V
-
10
12
14
GND
-
11
13
15
1T
NC
-
CRTSDA-P5P
MVSYNC-P5P
I/O
O
MHSYNC-P5P
CRTSCL-P5P
GND
O
I/O
-
2T
GND
-
C.34 CN9600 System board(FHMLS*)interface connector (40-pin)
Table C-34 System board I/F connector (40-pin)
Pin No.
1
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
2
Signal Name
GND
I/O
3
4
P5V
P5V
P5V
P5V
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
GND
GND
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
CRT1SD-P5P
M1VSYN-P3P
CRT1SC-P5P
M1HSYN-P3P
O
O
O
O
GND
DTR-PYP
TXD-PYN
DSR-PYP
I
I
O
O
RTS-PYP
RXD-PYN
GND
CTS-PYP
GND
GND
O
O
O
DCD-PYP
RING-PYP
GND
GND
GND
GND
VGAGND
VGAGND
VGAGND
GND
MBLUE-PXP
M1GRN-PXP
M1RED-PXP
GND
O
O
O
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
C-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix C Pin Assignments
C.35 CN9601 Serial interface connector (9-pin)
Table C-35 Serial interface connector (9-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
DCD-PYN
TXD-PYN
GND
I/O
I
Pin No.
Signal Name
RXD-PYN
DTR-PYP
I/O
1
3
2
4
6
8
I
O
I
O
-
5
DSR-PYP
7
RTS-PYP
RING-PYP
GND
O
I
CTS-PYP
I
9
1T
-
2T
GND
-
Fingerprint Sensor board (FHMLF*)
C.36 CN9650 System board(FHMLS*) interface connector (8-pin)
Table C-35 System board interface connector (8-pin)
Pin No.
Signal Name
GND
I/O
Pin No.
Signal Name
NC
I/O
-
-
-
1
3
2
4
6
8
O
I/O
-
E3V
FGSPON-S3N
ZUSBFS-E3N
GND
-
5
GND
I/O
-
7
ZUSBFS-E3P
GND
-
1T
C-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Appendix D
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
Note
Make
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
‘ ~
1 !
2 @
3 #
4 $
5 %
6 ^
7 &
8 *
9 (
0 )
- _
= +
BkSp
Tab
Q
29
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13
19
1A
1B
A9
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
*1
*1
*1
*1
W
E
R
T
Y
U
*1
*1
*1
*1
I
O
P
[ {
] }
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Cap
Keytop
Note
No.
Make
Break
Make
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
\ ¦
2B
3A
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AB
BA
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
*2
Caps Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
*1
*1
*1
*1
K
L
; :
‘ “
43
44
45
Enter
1C
2A
56
9C
AA
D6
5A
12
61
F0
F0
F0
5A
12
61
*3
Shift (L)
No.102
key
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Z
X
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
C
V
B
N
M
*1
*1
*1
*1
, <
. >
/ ?
57
Shift (R)
36
B6
59
F0
59
D-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
Note
Make
Break
Make
58
60
Ctrl
Alt (L)
Space
ALT (R)
Ins
1D
38
9D
B8
B9
14
11
29
F0
F0
F0
14
11
29
11
70
71
6B
6C
69
75
72
7D
7A
74
*3
*3
61
39
62
E0 38
E0 52
E0 53
E0 B8 E0 11
E0 D2 E0 70
E0 D3 E0 71
E0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
75
E0
E0
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
*4
76
Del
←
79
E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0
80
Home
End
↑
E0 47
E0 4F
E0 48
E0 50
E0 49
E0 51
E0 C7 E0 6C E0
81
E0 CF E0 69
E0 C8 E0 75
E0 D0 E0 72
E0
E0
E0
83
84
↓
85
PgUp
PgDn
→
E0 C9 E0 7D E0
E0 D1 E0 7A E0
86
89
E0 4D E0 CD E0 74
E0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
Esc
F1
01
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
81
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
*3
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
78
07
122
123
124
126
202
203
204
F11
F12
57
58
D7
D8
F0
F0
78
07
*3
*3
PrintSc
Pause
Fn
Refer to table 2-25
Refer to table 2-25
*5
Win
E0
E0
5B E0 DB E0
5D E0 DD E0
1F E0
2F E0
F0
F0
1F
2F
App
Notes:
1. * Scan codes differ by overlay function.
2. * This key corresponds to key No. 42 in the 102 key mode.
3. * Combination with the Fn key makes different codes.
4. * Scan codes differ by mode.
5. * The Fn key does not generate a code by itself..
D-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Cap Key
Code set 1
Make Break
E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12
Code set 2
No.
top
Make
Break
55
75
76
79
/
INS E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12
DEL E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12
E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12
←
80 Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12
81
83
84
End E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12
E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12
E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12
↑
↓
85 PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12
86 PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12
89
E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12
→
203
204
Win E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12
App E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key.
In the case of Key no. 55 Overlay mode only.
In combination with the right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
With left Shift
With right Shift
Set 1
Set 2
E0 AA ___________E0 B6
E0 2A ____________E0 36
E0 F0 12 _________E0 F0 59
E0 12 ____________E0 59
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Cap
No.
Key
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
top
Make
Break
Make
75
76
INS
DEL
←
E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12
79
80
Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12
81
End
↑
E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12
83
84
↓
85
PgUp E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12
PgDn E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12
86
89
E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12
→
203
204
Win
App
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key
Cap
Key
top
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
No.
Make
5A
43
58
ENT
CTRL
E0
E0
E0
1C
1D
38
E0
E0
E0
9C
9D
B8
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
F0
F0
F0
5A
14
11
14
11
60
LALT
121
122
123
ARROW
45
45
46
C5
77
77
7E
F0
F0
F0
77
77
7E
NUMERIC
Scrl
C5
C5
D-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendices
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Code set 1
Break
Code set 2
Break
Cap
No.
Keytop
(8)
Make
Make
09
10
11
23
24
25
26
37
38
39
40
52
54
55
8
9
0
U
I
48
49
37
4B
4C
4D
4A
4F
50
51
4E
52
53
C8
C9
B7
CB
CC
CD
CA
CF
D0
D1
CE
D2
D3
75
7D
7C
6B
73
74
7B
69
72
7A
79
70
71
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
75
7D
7C
6B
73
74
7B
69
72
7A
79
70
71
4A
(9)
(*)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(–)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(+)
(0)
(.)
O
P
J
K
L
;
M
.
/
(/)
E0
35
E0
B5
40
4A
E0
F0
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Key
top
Code set 1
Code set 2
Shift
Make
Break
Make
Break
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
E0 37
E0 37
54
E0 B7
E0 B7
D4
E0 7C
E0 7C
84
E0 F0 7C
E0 F0 7C
F0 B4
Ctrl +
Shift +
Alt +
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Key
top
Shift
Code set 1
Make
Code set 2
Make
Pause Common E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14
*
F0 77
Ctrl*
E0 46 E0 C6
E0 7E E0 F0 7E
*: This key generates only make codes.
D-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E Key Layout
Appendices
4
Appendix E Key Layout
4.31 E.1 United Kingdom (UK) Keyboard
Figure E-1 UK keyboard
4.31 E.2 United States (US) Keyboard
Figure E-2 US keyboard
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix E Key Layout
E-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
Appendices
4
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
F.1 RGB Monitor Loopback Connector
Figure F-1 RGB Monitor Loopback Connector
F.2 RS-232C Loopback Connector
Figure F-2 RS-232C Loopback Connector
F-1
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
F.3 RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 9-pin)
Figure F-3 RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 9-pin)
F.4 RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 25-pin)
Figure F-4 RS-232C direct connection cable (9-pin to 25-pin)
F-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
Appendices
F.5 LAN Loopback Connector
Figure F-5 LAN Loopback Connector
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix F Wiring diagrams
F-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
Appendices
4
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the
system BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
‰ BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the tilde character key until a beep sounds.
For example
(US Keyboard)
(UK Keyboard)
6. The BIOS rewriting starts
7. When the process is completed, it beeps and the system automatically reboots.
NOTE: 1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.
2. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS. If the rewrite
fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
3
If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a message
may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been erased. In this
case, insert the BIOS rewriting disk and the BIOS will be rewritten.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix G BIOS rewrite procedures
G-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
Appendices
4
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
‰ EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
NOTE: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBC only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the contents of the EC/KBC have been
erased. In this case, insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk and the
EC/KBC will be rewritten.
5. Normally it takes about 30 seconds to rewrite the EC/KBC. It may take 3
minutes (maximum), depending on the conditions of the computer or ICs.
The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or turn off
the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC Card.
4. Connect an USB FDD and insert the BIOS/EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB
FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. (Keep holding down the key
until a beep sounds.) The EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
H-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix H EC/KBC rewrite procedures
H-2
[CONFIDENTIAL] TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I Reliability
Appendices
4
Appendix I Reliability
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures).
Table I-1 MTBF
Time (hours)
5161
MTBF
I-1
TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)[CONFIDENTIAL]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix I Reliability
I-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]TECRA A9(S5/P5/S200) Maintenance Manual (960-633)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|